JP7461549B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine with a characteristic counting process [Solution] A gaming machine equipped with a first operating means, a second operating means, a gaming control means capable of executing control regarding the progress of a game, and a gaming value number control means capable of managing the number of gaming values related to the gaming value used in a game, the gaming value number control means being a means capable of executing a counting process of the number of gaming values in response to the operation of the first operating means, the gaming value number control means being a means capable of executing an insertion process of the number of gaming values in response to the operation of the second operating means, and when the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated, the insertion process in response to the operation of the second operating means is executed, and there are cases where the counting process in response to the operation of the first operating means is not executed. [Selected Figure] Fig. 113

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine typified by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) and a reel game machine (slot machine).

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that do not require actual medals to play (medalless) (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2023-58762 A

There is room for improvement in the counting process for gaming machines like the one above.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine with distinctive counting processing.

In order to solve the above problems, the game machine of the present invention includes:
a first operating means;
a second operating means;
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A game value number control means capable of managing the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means having a gaming value number storage means capable of storing the number of gaming values,
The number of game values control means is a means capable of executing a process of counting the number of game values in accordance with the operation of the first operation means,
The number of game values control means is a means that can set the number of game values to be counted by the counting process in accordance with the operation of the first operation means,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of executing processing of inserting the number of gaming values in accordance with the operation of the second operating means,
When the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated, the second operation is performed before the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operating means is executed. When the input process is executed in accordance with the operation of the means, and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means becomes 0 after the execution of the input process (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). ),
In the first case, the number of gaming values scheduled to be counted is cleared without counting by the counting process;
It is characterized by

The present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with unique counting processing.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. This is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. A diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control status command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. A diagram showing details of the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. (a) is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. 13 is a table showing game control state commands. 13 is a table showing medal count control state commands. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. 13A is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing details of the response command returned from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. FIG. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game control section main processing. 16 is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. 15. 17 is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 16. 18 is a flowchart of the settlement button process (step S1102) in FIG. 17. It is a flowchart of the fluctuation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIGS. 17, 18, and 22. 20 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 19. 21 is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 16 and 20. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 15. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a game control unit timer interrupt process. 24 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 23. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process. 28 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 27; 11 is a table showing a target range of a RAM clear process. 30 is a flowchart of an error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 28 etc. 28 is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 27. 33 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 32. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of a lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 27. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of medal count control unit timer interrupt processing. 38 is a flowchart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 37. 40 is a flowchart of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 38. 38 is a flowchart of the scheduled counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 37. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in FIG. 37. This is a flowchart of the game control state command receiving process (step S4304) in Figure 41. It is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 41. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 41. 45 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 44. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the settlement command receiving process (step S4519) in FIG. 44. 45 is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 44. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game information setting process (step S4806, S4A19) in FIG. 47, FIG. 49. 45 is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 44. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 49. 45 is a flowchart of the error command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 44. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 37. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the process of sending a medal count control command to the game control unit (step S408) in FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 37. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the medal insertion process of FIG. 17. 21 is a flowchart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 20; 46 is a flowchart showing a modification of the submission command reception process of FIG. 45. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 40. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the planned count number update process of FIG. 40 . (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. 13 is a timing chart showing a first example of a presentation when counting is being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a counting end presentation. It is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. 67(a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67(c), and FIG. 67(b) is a timing chart showing an example of the case in which a power outage occurs when the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 sheets in the example shown in FIG. 67(c) and then power is restored. 60 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 59. FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the “number of game medals” stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored. It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the operation of the counting button 171 is started. 74 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 73. 74 is a timing chart showing another modified example of the example shown in FIG. 73. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing other examples of change display in the game medal count display device 170. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 78. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be performed exceeding the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification. (a) is a timing chart when payout is about to be performed exceeding the second threshold for payout, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example in which a notification urging a count overlaps with a highly urgent error notification. 13A shows an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after switching to a demonstration display, and FIG. 13B shows an example of the notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number; , is a diagram showing an example of notification that prompts counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notification is issued to prompt counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player. FIG. 7(c) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the count button 171 is operated at a disadvantage to the player. (a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 86(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has been forcibly terminated is restarted, and (c) This is an example of the modified example explained using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). It is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modified example in which the operation differs depending on whether the “number of game medals” is less than a certain threshold value. It is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. A diagram showing the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed and held. It is a figure showing an example of the performance performed according to the number of game medals. A figure showing an example of a presentation executed depending on the number of medals acquired in the AT state. A figure showing an example of the operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. A diagram showing an example of operation when a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement when the upper limit exceeded error of the number of game medals and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a period for allowing the output of the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. A diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 during the operation of FIG. 98(a). A diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 during the operation of FIG. 98(b). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a communication cycle between each control unit and the device. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of count notification transmission processing (step S305) in the medal number control unit main processing of FIG. 27. FIG. A flowchart showing an example of sound control processing (step S511) in the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 in Figure 60 (a). FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of a counting sound set in the process of FIG. 103. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG.

The following describes a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, using the drawings.

<Basic embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. ``Number'' shall be used.

The slot machine described below is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple reels with multiple types of symbols each begin to spin when a predetermined operation to start spin is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the operation to start spin, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined operation to stop spin is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the results of the lottery match the predetermined payout conditions, a process to pay out the number of game medals is executed and the game ends, but if they do not match, the process to pay out the number of game medals is not executed and the game ends.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be described using Figure 1. Figure 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. The symbols displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 are the left reel upper symbols, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 are the left reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 are the left reel lower symbols, the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 are the middle reel middle row symbols, the symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel lower row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the right reel 112 are the middle reel upper row symbols. The symbols displayed on the upper row are called the right reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel middle row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel lower row symbols, and each reel 110 Three symbols of each of the symbols 112 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of 9 symbols. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the display window 113. It is preferable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this optical sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be activated, and if two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line will be added. When the book is valid and three medals are bet, five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the right-up winning line become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right horizontal winning line. Five lines, including the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific prize winning combination (for example, a bonus prize, a special prize) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internally winning state has been carried over. This is a lamp to notify the player. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When it is pressed once, one sheet is inserted, when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 2 sheets) is inserted, and when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 3 sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110, the second stop operation is a stop operation for the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation for the right reel 112 is referred to as a "sequential push operation order" or simply This is called a "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is a stop operation for the right reel 112, the second stop operation is a stop operation for the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110 is called a "reverse push". This is called ``operation order'' or simply ``reverse push''. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display device for displaying information regarding the operation order (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. This instruction monitor 125 is also composed of a 7 segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, right stop button 139, middle stop button 139, When instructing to operate the stop buttons 138 in this order, "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125.

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted gaming medals (number of bets) to the medal number control unit 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device that displays the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG.

The count button 171 is an operating means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2 to the lending machine 700.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 2) installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 160 is arranged at the top of the front door 102, and the sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 2) to the outside is provided at the top of the performance device 160. This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 163, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the performance image display device 157, the display screen of the performance image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). It should be noted that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. It is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved. This performance image display device 157 corresponds to an example of a performance means.

The lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 is sometimes referred to as a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This rental machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" referred to here. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to general players who are not registered as members. The other is a member card, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to member players who are registered as members at the gaming center. An IC card is used as the card.

A value is stored in the card. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)".

The "number of gaming medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can be converted into the "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" is obtained by debiting the "money balance" or "number of possessed medals" on the card. The "number of gaming medals" also includes the number of medals won by winning. This "number of gaming medals" is managed by the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic gaming value). The "number of gaming medals" is decremented by inserting medals using the bet buttons 130, 132.

The "number of medals possessed" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)" into a count. This "number of medals possessed" is stored in a manner that allows it to be specified by the player's card. In other words, by operating the count button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals possessed" and can be stored on the card. The "number of medals possessed" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals possessed that is installed in the gaming facility.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 for inserting bills upward and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting a card below. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is accepted by the card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of banknotes inserted into the banknote insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the banknote is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance."

An information display 703 is provided below the bill insertion slot 701. This information display 703 is a display that provides operation guidance for the lending machine 700 and the status of the slot machine 100 through text and images. The surface may be configured as a touch panel, allowing various operations to be input by touching various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two levels, upper and lower. The monetary balance display 705 displays the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as an amount. On the other hand, the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is displayed on the medal number balance display 706 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 700. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation to obtain the "number of game medals" by withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. Specifically, if the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the amount of money withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Further, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Furthermore, even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" for the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing it from the "number of medals you have" stored on the card. good. The card return button 708 is operated by the player when the player ends the game, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 and ejecting the card. It is. The "number of medals you have" determined at the end of the game is calculated by subtracting the number of medals converted to "number of game medals" from the "number of medals you have" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. The number of medals is the sum of the number of game medals counted by the operation.

The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" explained above are converted in the following order: "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held". In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the "number of game medals" can be used to set the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new slot machine (managed game machine) that does not use real medals for playing games, without confusing players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which real medals are loaned out, credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the number of bets is set using the credits.

Note that although the "number of stored medals" is not mentioned in this specification, the "number of stored medals" is the number of medals that are not stored in the card but deposited at the gaming parlor. At the gaming parlor, the number of medals a player has acquired through games is managed as "scores" during the day using the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. It may also be managed as a number. If both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of medals held" are stored, the "number of medals held" is preferentially debited. Further, both the "number of medals held" and the "number of stored medals" may be stored in a host server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 5) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals held" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals held" may be stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number. When storing the card number in correspondence with the card number in the host server, data that can identify the time stored in the host server may be written on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. In addition, the "monetary balance" is written directly on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. The timing at which the "number of medals held" is stored in the card (membership card, visitor card) or host server is, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is operated and counting processing is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes playing the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 is temporarily stored in the hall management terminal 800 as stored medals. When the player inserts the card into the same or another lending machine 700 again on the same day as the day on which the card was returned, only the "number of medals held" for that day, which was once stored as stored medals, will be transferred to the lending machine again. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the game can be played.

The rental machine 700 may also be equipped with an IR photosensitive unit that receives infrared signals from a remote control carried by an attendant at the amusement center, converts them into electronic signals, and outputs them.

Furthermore, in the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. The "number of medals held" may be debited and converted into the "number of game medals". Specifically, the lending machine 700 is provided with a medal button, and when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of medals", an LED lamp built into the medal button can be pulled out. It lights up in a manner that represents. By operating the held medal button in this state, if the number of held medals is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces), a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces) of the "number of game medals" is added. In addition, the number of medals that a player has earned through playing, as described above, can be stored on the card as "scores" during the day, or can be managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. If there is a "point", the LED lamp built into the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 2. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308.

《Main control section》
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game, and a medal number control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control section 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal number control section 350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, reel symbol arrangement, stop position, etc., and a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the medal number control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control section 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown), and when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 controls the game when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. (Starts main control section main processing, which will be described later).

The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the state of each bet button 130, 132, the start lever 135, each stop button 137-139, and the settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it detects that the bet buttons 130, 132 are turned on, a process is executed to electronically insert medals stored electronically in the medal count control unit 350 as medals to be inserted into the game. When it detects that the start lever 135 is turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery. When it detects that the left stop button 137, the center stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110-112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoppable state, it executes stop control of the reels 110-112. When it detects that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, it executes a process to electronically return the inserted gaming medals to the medal count control unit 350.

The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 also monitors the status of various sensors 318 (optical sensors of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. The optical sensors of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information indicating how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it becomes L level until it becomes L level again is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 drives display devices such as a drive circuit 322 that drives motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 3) provided on the reels 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127. A drive circuit 324 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, etc.). We are prepared.

Further, in the slot machine 100, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to the player. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 that is operated when changing this setting value is connected to the game control section 302.

Further, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control section 302, and the main control section 300 inputs an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 5) etc. via this information output circuit 328. 650, game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power supply management unit (not shown), and this voltage monitoring circuit outputs a low voltage signal indicating a drop in voltage to each of the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (e.g., 9V).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

The medal count control unit 350, like the game control unit 302, is equipped with a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 362 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same board and are connected via a buffer IC. This allows the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 without using the ROM 356 and the RAM 358, and allows the CPU 354 to use the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 without using the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown in the figure is also installed. The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator not shown as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 354 for each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. This medal count control unit 350 executes interrupt processing (medal count control unit timer interrupt processing described below) every 0.745 ms. Also, communication with the lending machine 700 is repeated at 300 ms intervals.

The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also has a start-up signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and when a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit, the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also starts medal count control (starts the medal count control unit main processing described below).

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 350 is connected to a game medal count display device 170 consisting of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171, and a game medal count clear button 172.

Further, a lending machine 700 is also connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 via a lending machine connecting terminal board 790. The medal number control unit 350 performs bidirectional communication with the lending machine 700.

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302. Further, the game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350. That is, the communication between the medal number control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also bidirectional communication.

Further, the medal number control unit 350 stores the “number of game medals” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal number control unit 350 updates the "number of game medals" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. The addition process includes a process based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, a process based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and a process based on a lending notice sent from the lending machine 700. can be given. On the other hand, examples of the subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on the input command transmitted from the game control section 302.

Note that the game medal count clear button 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the. For example, if a player leaves the game with ``2'' remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to judge whether the player who left ``2'' intends to continue playing or not, and another player Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the operation of the clerk, another player can be welcomed early. Note that when the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared; for example, it is cleared when the number of game medals is 2 or less, and when it is 3 or more. , counting may be performed in the same way as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 is malfunctioning or the like and it cannot be recognized that the counting button 171 has been operated, it may not be possible to convert the "number of game medals" to the "number of medals held", which may put the player at a disadvantage. However, if counting can be performed by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the clerk, there is no increase in costs. Note that clearing and counting may not be separated by determining the number of game medals, but may be separated into clearing and counting depending on the operating method of the number of game medals clear button 172. For example, if the button is pressed for a short time, it is cleared, and if the button is pressed for a long time, it is counted. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Further, when only the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the count is cleared, and when the number of game medals clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time, it is counted. There is less chance of making a mistake in operation, and it is easy to select between clearing and counting.

《Sub-control section》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via an input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, and data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is provided with speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277. These speakers 272, 277 correspond to an example of a performance means.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 144, title panel lamps, bet button lamps, reel backlights, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface. The various lamps 420 correspond to an example of a presentation means.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

Next, an example of the connection between each board such as the power supply control board, the main control part board, and the first sub-control part board, and each unit such as the reel unit and the production movable body unit will be explained.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

In FIG. 3, the power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B, the first sub-control board 400B, the reel unit 109, and the performance movable body unit 160U are shown. The performance movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated into the performance device 160 shown in FIG. 1. The shutter 163 is an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power supply control board 252B, the main control unit board 300B, and the first sub-control unit board 400B. Further, one or more connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are also shown on each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

The island equipment installed in the gaming machine store steps down the 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted to a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Note that it may be converted to other DC voltages, but the explanation here will be about a 24V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage.

The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 3 shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line, as well as a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC connected to the 5V power supply line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Also shown is a power switch 244.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a 24V DC current and also a 5V DC current through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to connector PC3 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC3 and connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and 24V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to connector PC4 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC4 and connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and 5V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

Note that 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B using separate harnesses, similarly to the first sub-control board 400B. Furthermore, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, similarly to the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Further, the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

The main control board 300B also has a reel motor driving IC 322i mounted thereon. The reel motor driving IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 322 shown in FIG. 2. The reel motor driving IC 322i is also supplied with 24V DC and 5V DC. Although not shown, the main control board 300B also has the game control unit 302 and medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 324, 326, etc. mounted thereon.

In addition, the connector MC2 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i of the main control board 300B is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1, the connector MC3 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected and the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and the 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor driving IC 322i are supplied to the reel unit 109 through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3, respectively, and each of the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel can be driven. In addition, the control signals (commands) that control each of the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side can be combined into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side can also be combined into one connector, and connected with one common harness. However, even though it is called one common harness, it is actually a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for sending commands) and is not used for supplying current.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. Further, the first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 3 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

The first sub-control board 400B also has a movable body motor driving IC 424i mounted thereon. This movable body motor driving IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 424 shown in FIG. 2. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are both supplied to the movable body motor driving IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B also has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 2 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 424, 426, etc. mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, enabling the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U to be driven. In addition, a control signal (command) that controls the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through this harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 2, and although not shown in FIG. 3, the second sub-control board is also supplied with 24V DC and 5V DC from the power supply control board 252B through a harness not shown. The second sub-control board is also connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the performance device (performance image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by harnesses MR1 to MR3. In addition, the first sub-control board 400B and the performance movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

Which of the monitor LEDs shown in Fig. 3 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL) lights up when the power is on. ) is also off when the power is off.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 3) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1, and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to be lit for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may be provided in the 5V power supply line as well.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to be lit for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues to be lit for a while.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1 and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B also flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2 and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, are lit. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL will continue to light for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided on the 24V power line. On the other hand, since there is no capacitor on the 5V power line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will immediately go out when manual rotation is stopped.

The above description explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown in No. 3 is lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is rotated manually, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will light up, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL will not light up. As a result, if the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are lit up when the left reel 110 is manually spun, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B are turned on by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, we suspect that there is an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. I can do it. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is rotated manually, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I can do it.

Here, the explanation is for the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power outage state, but the case where the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in a power outage state is also explained, and the right reel 112 is manually rotated in a power outage state. The same applies when rotating. Furthermore, as the number of manually rotated reels increases, the monitor LED lights up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, even if the LEDs used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, such as the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, error monitoring LEDs that light up when an error occurs, or signal monitoring LEDs) are installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, they will light up if there is no electrical connection problem when the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power-off state. Therefore, even if the LEDs are used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, it is possible to check for electrical connection problems.

Even if the power is cut off, the shutter 163 shown in Figure 1 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to the back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 3) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the movable body motor driving IC 424i. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power control board 252B, and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also turned on by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B are emitting light.

The induced current flowing into the power control board 252B further flows into the main control board 300B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector MC5. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be.

The above explanation is of the phenomenon that occurs when each harness SD, PS1, PS2, PM is connected to the connector normally and is not broken. On the other hand, if the harness SD is broken or not connected normally to the connector DC1 and/or connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will light up, and the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will remain off, no matter how much the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness SD or a poor connection with the connectors DC1 and SC3 can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL will light up, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or connector MC5, then when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will not light up even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, then an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors PC2 and MC5 can be suspected.

Figure 4 shows an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in Figure 3 and the reel unit 109 also shown in Figure 3. The following will focus on the differences from the connection example explained using Figure 3, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In FIG. 4, connector MC5 and connector MC6 provided on main control unit board 300B are omitted from illustration. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Furthermore, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 4 as well, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power-off state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if they are normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 4, since the reel relay board 902B is provided, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 3, so electrical connection defects may occur. It has become more sexual. However, an induced current is generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and a defective electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. By manually operating the reel in a power outage state to generate an induced current, and turning on these monitor LEDs if normal, it is possible to check for poor electrical connections.

In the explanation here, the left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, and shutter 163 are given as examples of movable bodies, but they are not limited to these and any movable body driven by a motor can be used.

Furthermore, instead of an LED lamp that is lit by an induced current in a power failure state, a light-emitting means such as a seven-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a seven-segment display that displays settings (e.g., setting 1 to setting 6) that indicate different degrees of advantage to the player. The requirement for the light-emitting means is that it must be visible. Note that these light-emitting means do not move even when the motor is driven. This is because the light-emitting means is not provided on a movable body that is driven and moved by the motor, but on a fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to cause the monitor LED to emit light using an induced current in a power-off state, but means that can adjust the impedance may also be used. That's fine, and it's not limited to adjustable resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems, so instead of adjusting the impedance just to make it easier for the induced current to flow when the power is off, the impedance should also be adjusted in consideration of what happens when the current is on. need to be adjusted.

The above-described configuration is as follows:
A light emitting means;
A game machine including a movable body unit having a movable body that can be operated by driving a motor,
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power interruption state to drive the motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
This is an example of a gaming machine characterized in that the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 5, the gaming system S has the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the loaner machine 700, hall computer 600, hall management terminal 800, intermediate management terminal 810, and management server 820 also shown in FIG. 1. The loaner machine 700, hall computer 600, and hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it is equipped with a memory means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer separate from the hall computer 600, and is installed in each amusement hall (hall) H1, H2, etc., and is connected to the lending machine 700. The lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, and therefore the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700. Information on the number of medals exchanged between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 (counting information and lending information), as well as information on the operating status of the slot machine 100, are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages this input information.

The management server 820 is provided for the overall management of the gaming system 1, and stores and manages information relating to the slot machines 100 and the rental machines 700, such as information identifying the slot machines 100 and information identifying the rental machines 700 (gaming machine installation information). The management server 820 is also connected to the hall management terminals 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminals 810, and manages information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminals 800, such as information relating to the number of medals and information relating to the operating status of the slot machines 100.

<Communication sequence and communication content>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 transmits game control unit commands (game control status command, game control priority command) to the medal count control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. Meanwhile, the medal count control unit 350 transmits medal count control commands (medal count control status command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. Note that the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command in preference to the game control status command. Also, the medal count control unit 350 transmits the response command corresponding to the game control priority command in preference to the medal count control status command.

In the communication between the gaming control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, and in the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are sent and received.

Figure 6 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 6(a) includes three types of status information: advantageous status information, setting status information, and front door status information. The advantageous status information is composed of information indicating whether or not the bonus equivalent to RB is in operation (RB information), information indicating whether or not the bonus equivalent to BB is in operation (BB information), and information indicating whether or not the bonus equivalent to AT (assist time) is in operation (AT information). The setting status information is composed of information indicating whether or not the setting is changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 2 (setting change in progress information), and information indicating whether or not the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation in progress information). The front door status information is information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in an open state (door open information). The AT state is a gaming state in which auxiliary functions are activated to allow the player to obtain advantageous results, such as notification of the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notification of the target pattern to be stopped.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6(b) includes total number of coins inserted, total number of coins paid out, MY counter value information, total number of coins paid out for accessory objects, total number of consecutive prizes paid out, information on number of games played, and role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total number of inserted medals information is information representing the number of inserted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The total number of medals to be paid out information is information representing the number of medals to be paid out that has been accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power was turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which notification of the stop operation order for internally won winning combinations is executed, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals after entering this state. The information on the total number of medals to be paid out for accessory objects is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the accessory object accumulated since the power was turned on. The information on the total number of medals to be paid out as a continuous accessory is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the RB, which has been accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The winning ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (accessory object ratio, continuous role object ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructional object ratio, and object condition ratio) for evaluating the degree of gambling of a gaming machine. become.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 6(c) includes two pieces of information: gaming control unit information and medal count control unit information. The gaming control unit information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the gaming control unit 302, the manufacturer code of that IC chip, and the product code of that IC chip. The medal count control unit information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal count control unit 350, the manufacturer code of that IC chip, and the product code of that IC chip.

Figure 7 shows the communication sequence when a game control status command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

FIG. 7 shows, from the left, a first sub-control unit 400, a game control unit 302, a medal number control unit 350, and a lending machine 700.

First, before explaining the game control state command, communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be explained. A medal number control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the medal number control section 350 and the lending machine 700. Communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed at a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 7, the medal count control unit 350 transmits a gaming machine information notification and a counting notification to the lending machine 700. In addition, the lending machine 700 transmits a lending notification to the medal count control unit 350, and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700.

Figure 8 (a) shows the data structure of the message exchanged in the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This message is composed of five types of items: message length, command, serial number, data section, and checksum. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number for gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number for counting notification, and the lending serial number for lending notification and lending reception result response notification. The range of each serial number is 0 to 255. When the power is turned on, the serial number becomes 0, and when it reaches 255, it returns to 1 and then repeats from 1 to 255. The data section stores various data, and the checksum stores the lowest 1 byte of the total obtained by adding up the data from the message length to the data section.

FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of pachinko game machine, reel type game machine, arranged ball game machine, etc. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. In addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described using FIG. 6, the gaming machine information type includes hole control/fraud monitoring information. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

Figure 9 (a) shows details of hole control and fraud monitoring information.

The game medal count information is information that represents the current game medal count stored in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350.

The medal count information is information on the change in the number of medals inserted (-3 to 3 medals) since the previous gaming machine information notification, depending on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals returned if there are any returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see Figure 1) is operated. In other words, this information is based on the information on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals settled, which are included in the gaming control priority commands (insertion command, settlement command) sent from the gaming control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The number of paid out medals information is information representing the number of paid out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on the information on the medal payout number included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 6(a) described using FIG. In addition to this, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

Gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

Figure 9 (b) is a list of error codes. The various errors shown in Figure 9 (b) are also handled by medal count control status commands, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and game control priority commands (error occurrence commands), which will be described later.

Below, only errors that require special explanation will be explained. A medal number control disconnection is an error that occurs when the game control unit 302 detects a disconnection in the medal number control unit 350, and a game control disconnection is the opposite. This is an error when detected. The game order abnormality is an error in which the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error in which the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is outside the range of 0 to 15. That is, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out at one time is 15 coins. The mismatch in the number of coins to be paid is an error that occurs when the number of coins to be paid included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is greater than or equal to the number of inserted coins. The chip ID number mismatch is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control unit information shown in FIG. 6(c) is different from the previous information. The medal number control RAM error is an error indicating a defect in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350. The rental machine communication abnormality is an error, which will be described in detail later, in which a rental notification has not been received even though the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is in an on state. In any case where the various errors shown in FIG. 9(b) occur, all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. 1 are turned on, and the speaker 272 outputs an error notification sound. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

In addition to the setting status information and front door information shown in FIG. 6(a), the game machine fraud information includes information when fraud is detected and information indicating that the number of game medals has been cleared. Contains information and security signals indicating that fraud is being detected.

The information on the number of game information includes information on the current number of bets and information on the number of payouts. These two types of information are distinguished by type information. The current number of bets is included in the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. Becomes the current bet value. Further, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the payout number becomes the value of the payout number included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 8(b), the gaming machine information notification sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at 300 ms intervals stores gaming machine information of the code specified by the gaming machine information type. That is, when the gaming machine information type value is 0, gaming machine performance information is stored, when the gaming machine information type value is 1, gaming machine installation information is stored, and when the gaming machine information type value is 2, hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control and fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time (e.g., 180 seconds), the gaming machine installation information is notified once at the second time (e.g., 60 seconds), and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is notified every shortest third time (e.g., 300 ms of the notification cycle). When the notification timing of these three pieces of information overlaps, the notification of the gaming machine installation information is given the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is hole control and fraud monitoring information, which are notified the most frequently.

Figure 8 (c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data part of the counting notification transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at 300 ms intervals. As shown in Figure 7, the counting notification is notified within a range of 90 ms to 100 ms from the start of the notification of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer that is set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in Figure 32, which will be described later. Also, as will be described in detail later, when the counting button 171 shown in Figure 1 is pressed once, the counting number increases by one medal, and when the counting button 171 is pressed multiple times until the 300 ms cycle arrives, the number of medals for the number of times it is pressed becomes the counting number. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more and the 300 ms cycle arrives, the counting number becomes 50 medals. In other words, the counting number can be set in units of one medal, or 50 medals can be set at once. However, if the counted number exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the counted number. The counted medal number information is information that represents the counted number determined by the operation of the count button 171 until the 300 ms cycle arrives. The accumulated counted medal number is information that represents the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on.

Figure 8 (d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data part of the loan notification transmitted from the loaning machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 at 300 ms intervals. As shown in Figure 7, the loaning machine 700 notifies the medal count control unit 350 of the loan notification within 170 ms from the start of receiving the count notification. The medal count control unit 350 monitors whether the loan notification is notified within 170 ms by a loan notification interval timer that is set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in Figure 34 described later. When the loan button 707 of the loaning machine 700 shown in Figure 1 is operated, if the "money balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (e.g., 1000 yen) or more, the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount (e.g., 50 medals) becomes the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "money balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of medals lent out is thus information that indicates the number of medals lent out in response to the operation of the lending button 707. Note that the specified amount or the number of medals equivalent to the specified amount can be set in advance in the lending machine 700.

Figure 8 (e) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the loan receipt result response sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the loaner machine 700. As will be described in more detail later, the medal count control unit 350 determines whether the number of loaned medals notified by the loan notification is 50 or less, whether the number of game medals stored in RAM 358 is less than the loan threshold (e.g., 15,000), whether counting processing has not been performed, etc., and determines the loaned medal count receipt result as either normal or abnormal. In the loan receipt result response, this receipt result is sent to the loaner machine 700.

Next, a description will be given of the game control status command that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 7 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms.

FIG. 10 is a table showing game control status commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 10 also shows command offsets used during transmission.

The gaming control unit 302 sends commands representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms has passed, it sends commands representing setting state information (setting change in progress information, setting confirmation in progress information), and after 2.98 ms has passed, it sends a command representing front door state information (door open information). This completes the transmission of gaming machine state information.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted sheet number information) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 13H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 14H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Next, after 2.98 ms, information showing the total number of coins dispensed in 3 bytes (total number of coins dispensed information) is sent in 3 separate byte increments at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 16H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 17H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the third byte is sent with a command type of 18H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information (MY counter value information) expressing the MY counter value in three bytes is sent in three batches of one byte each at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 19H, and after 2.98 ms the second byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 1AH, and after 2.98 ms the third byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 1BH.

Furthermore, after 2.98ms has elapsed, the information representing the total number of paid out tokens in 3 bytes (total number of paid out tokens information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each at an interval of 2.98ms. Send by. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects in 3 bytes (information on the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games played in 2 bytes (game number information) is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 22H, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 23H.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, the role ratio monitor information is sent over 5 commands at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the upper byte sends information representing the role ratio with a command type of 24H, the upper byte sends information representing the continuous role ratio with a command type of 25H, the upper byte sends information representing the advantageous zone ratio with a command type of 26H, the upper byte sends information representing the instruction-included role ratio with a command type of 27H, and the upper byte sends information representing the role etc. state ratio with a command type of 28H. This completes the transmission of gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, after 2.98 ms has passed, game control unit information is transmitted over 15 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 in 4 bytes is divided into 4 times of 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 3 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 8 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of gaming machine installation information.

Finally, the checksum value is transmitted. Once the transmission of the checksum value is complete, the system returns to transmitting advantageous state information, and thereafter repeats transmitting the game control state commands shown in FIG. 10 one by one in sequence every 2.98 ms. Note that if there is a game control priority command, the transmission of game control state commands is suspended until this command is transmitted.

Next, we will explain the medal count control status command that the medal count control unit 350 shown in Figure 7 sends to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms.

FIG. 11 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control status command is also a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 11 also shows command offsets used during transmission.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information and may include other information.

Next, after 5.96 ms has elapsed, the information stored in RAM 358, which is represented by 2 bytes as the "number of game medals played," is divided into one upper byte and one lower byte, and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. In other words, the lower byte is transmitted with a command type of 02H in the upper byte, and after 5.96 ms has elapsed, the upper byte is transmitted with a command type of 03H in the upper byte.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be counted (counted sheet number information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be lent (lending sheet number information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code described with reference to FIG. 9(b) is transmitted. Once transmission of the error code is complete, the process returns to transmitting the VL signal information, and thereafter repeats transmitting the medal count control status commands shown in FIG. 11 in sequence every 5.96 ms. Note that if there is a response command to the game control priority command, transmission of the medal count control status commands is suspended until this command is transmitted.

Next, we will explain the security commands sent from the game control unit 302 shown in Figure 7 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and information representing the number of sheets lent out. Note that the information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the counted number, and the information representing the number of lending medals are information transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 by the medal number control state command.

Furthermore, various processing commands are also sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400. Various processing commands include, for example, a command to return to normal when the power is restored, a command to start setting changes related to changing setting values, a command to end setting changes including changed setting values, an error occurrence command and an error cancellation command, and a command to change the number of sheets input. a bet command that includes a bet command, a settlement button command that indicates that the settlement button has been pressed, a performance information command that includes production information, a start lever reception command that indicates that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, and a settlement button command that indicates that the settlement button has been pressed. Examples include first to third press commands associated with acceptance of an operation, a game information command containing game information, a payout start command indicating the start of payout, and the like. Note that errors in the error generation command and error cancellation command include errors expressed by the error codes explained using FIG. This includes an open error, a rental machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, etc.

Figure 12 shows the communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. If there is a request for retransmission from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command, the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again.

Figure 13 (a) shows details of the game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is sent to the medal number control section 350, a response command is returned from the medal number control section 350, and when this response command is not returned, the transmission of the medal number control state command is continued. There are two types: The former game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 2. FIG. 12 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an input command, and a settlement command. The payout command is a command type whose upper byte is 04H and transmits the number of coins to be paid out (0 to 15), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 05H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 06H. to send the checksum. That is, in transmitting the payout command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The input command is a command type whose upper byte is 07H and transmits the number of sheets to be input (0 to 3 sheets), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, even when transmitting the input command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The settlement command sends the number of coins to be settled (0-3 coins) with a command type whose high-order byte is 0AH, then sends the command sequence number with a command type whose high-order byte is 0BH, and finally sends a checksum with a command type whose high-order byte is 0CH. In other words, when sending a settlement command, three commands are sent in succession.

When the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 12 receives game control priority command 1, it sends a response command.

FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing details of the response command returned from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302.

The response command is sent in response to a payout command (payout response), sent in response to an input command (input response), and sent in response to a settlement command (payment response). There is. In the response command, the value of the upper byte, which is the value of the command type, is 00H. The dispensing response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the dispensing command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold (for example, 16,383 pieces) due to payout.

The submission response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the submission command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of input, and abnormality corresponds to failure of input or invalid input.

The payment response is a response command that includes any one of normality, abnormality, and re-request for payment command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payment, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a threshold value for payment (for example, 16,383 coins) as a result of payment. Note that the settlement threshold has the same value as the above-mentioned payout threshold.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose upper byte is 01H, and includes various errors shown in FIG. 9(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type whose upper byte is 02H, and is a command that includes the normality of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302 or the failure of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type whose upper byte is 03H, and since the number of bets is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information representing the determined number of bets (current number of bets: 1 to 3) is included. This is a command.

"Pattern Arrangement"
A predetermined number of different symbols are arranged on each of the reels 110 to 112. In order to enhance the entertainment value of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reel 110 to 112 within the maximum reel-in range from the position where the reel is stopped.

《Type of winning role》
The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a small winning combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

<<Types of internal winning roles>>
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in that game, it is possible to win a combination corresponding to this internal winning combination. Note that, depending on the combination, the result of the internal winning combination may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of gaming conditions》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage changes by changing between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<<Processing Overview>>
The following describes, with reference to the drawings, the processing of the game control unit 302, medal count control unit 350, first sub-control unit 400, and second sub-control unit 500. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which actual medals are not used, but information equivalent to the number of real medals (virtual medal count), and in the following description, this information will be referred to as "medal count."

<<Game control unit main processing>>
First, the game control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Note that Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the flow of the game control unit main processing.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 which has received this start signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control unit main processing shown in FIG. 15 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including MY counters described later) are initialized. , allows operation of the WDT 314, sets initial values, etc. Note that when the settings are changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. Also, if it is determined in the recovery process that there is an abnormality in the backup data in the RAM 308, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been successfully completed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start lever reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 17.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the winning role selection table stored in ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery (role selection) is performed using this and the random number value obtained from the random number generation circuit 316 to determine the internal winning role. If any winning role (including an activated role) is selected as an internal winner as a result of the internal lottery, the flag for that winning role is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control unit 302.

In step S106, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S107, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S108.

In step S108, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, medal award processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 22.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

Next, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 15 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 16. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG. 15.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1003, one interrupt time waiting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process advances to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted. If a setting key operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if a setting key operation has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, a process for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350. If the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process advances to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is set on when a replay role is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process ends.

In step S1010, the current number of bets (current number of bets) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number of coins). If the current number of bets is smaller than the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1011, and if the current bet number is greater than or equal to the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1012.

In step S1011, the medal insertion process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. Details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1013. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1014.

In step S1014, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is ended.

Next, the details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 16.

First, in step S1101, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted. If operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, a payment button process is executed, and this medal insertion process is ended. Note that details of the payment button process will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not operation of either of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted. If operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has not been accepted, the medal insertion process ends.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1106. Note that this requested number of medals is a value used to set the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350.

In step S1106, the current bet amount is compared with the maximum bet amount (3 in this embodiment). If the current bet amount is not the same as the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet amount is equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1107, the maximum bet amount minus the current bet amount is set as the requested amount, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether the bet buttons 130, 132 that have been determined to have received an operation are the one-copy bet button 130. If the bet button 130, 132 determined to have received the operation is the one-copy bet button 130, the process advances to step S1109, otherwise the process advances to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1110.

In steps S1105 to S1109 above, if the current bet is the maximum bet, the requested number will be 0. Furthermore, if the MAX BET button 132 is operated when the current bet is less than the maximum bet, the requested number will be 3 if the maximum bet is 3 and the current bet is 0, if the current bet is 1 the requested number will be 2, and if the current bet is 2 the requested number will be 1. Furthermore, if the 1 BET button 130 is operated when the current bet is less than the maximum bet, the requested number will be 1.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be sent is an input command.

In step S1111, a process for sending change information to the medal count control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1112. Details of the process for sending change information to the medal count control unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is awaited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1113; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, and the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal insertion process is terminated.

Next, details of the payment button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 17 will be described using FIG. 18. This figure is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 17.

First, in step S1201, which is executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and then the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, the settlement button process is ended.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet amount are set, and the process advances to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. The value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is a settlement command.

In step S1205, a process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process advances to step S1206. Note that details of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG. 19.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", the payment button process is ended.

In step S1207, the current number of bets is set to 0, and this settlement button process is ended.

Next, the details of the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit (step S1111) during medal insertion processing in FIG. 17, the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit (step S1205) during the settlement button processing in FIG. 18, and the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit (step S1605) during the medal awarding processing in FIG. 22 will be described using FIG. 19. This figure is a flowchart of the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit (steps S1111, S1205, S1605) in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 22.

First, in step S1301 that is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the value of the remaining number of transmissions, and the process advances to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. This response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal count control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (there is no response), it indicates "abnormal."

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is any error status, the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 100 ms) is set to the value of the response standby timer, and the process advances to step S1305.

In step S1305, the remaining number of transmissions is decremented by one, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if the remaining number of transmissions is 0, the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. Note that details of this three-command transmission process will be described later using FIG. 20.

In step S1308, if the value of the response waiting timer is not 0, proceed to step S1309, and if the value of the response waiting timer is 0, proceed again to step S1303.

In step S1309, if a response has been received from the medal number control unit 350, the process advances to step S1310, and if not, the process advances to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the response received from the medal count control unit 350 is "request again," proceed again to step S1303; if the response received is anything other than this, proceed to step S1311.

In step S1311, the result of receiving the response from the medal number control unit 350 is stored as a response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the process of transmitting variable information to the medal count control unit in FIG. 19 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 20. This figure is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. 19. Here, a triple command refers to a command consisting of a group of three commands transmitted in succession, and in this embodiment, the deposit command, settlement command, and withdrawal command shown in FIG. 13(a) are each a triple command.

First, in step S1401, which is executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 21.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1405, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command sequence number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 21.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission contents (lower byte).

In step S1409, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 21.

Next, using FIG. 21, the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 16 (step S1014) and the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the triple command transmission process of FIG. Details of the command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, and S1409) will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 16 and 20.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit, and the priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 15 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 22. This figure is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 15.

First, in step S1601 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the number of coins to be paid out is set as the requested number of coins, and the process advances to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1601.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1605. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, a process for transmitting fluctuation information to the medal number control unit (FIG. 19) is executed, and the process advances to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1607; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process is ended.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1601.

《Game control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the game control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of game control part timer interrupt processing.

The game control unit 302 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1.49 ms), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start the game control unit timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically activated (in this embodiment) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (600 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). Then, restart is performed (once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt).

Note that when the power is cut off, a save process in step S214, which will be described later, is executed and a WDT interrupt occurs, and when the power is restored, the state returns to the state when the save process was executed. However, for example, if the power is restored early, communication may be resumed before the lending machine 700 is aware of the power outage to the slot machine 100, and as a result, there is a risk that a communication error may occur. In consideration of such a situation, the present embodiment is configured such that once a power outage occurs, communication is not restarted until the rental machine 700 side determines that the power has been cut off. The initial value of the count value of the WDT 314 described above is an example for realizing this configuration.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, processing corresponding to various errors such as an abnormality in the communication state with the medal number control unit 350 and an abnormality in the opening/closing state of the door is performed. Note that if there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processing according to the interrupt status is executed.

In step S206, medal number control command reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 25.

In step S207, the game control command transmission process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In step S208, a presentation command transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission by the main process or timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302 are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (e.g., basic command, bet command, start lever acceptance command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, first to third stop commands accompanying the stopping of the reels 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout completion command accompanying medal payout process, game status update command, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the game control unit 302, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the game control unit 302. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Further, various lamps 336 and various seven segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original values of each register. After that, the process returns to the game control unit main process shown in FIG. 15.

On the other hand, in step S214, information that needs to be saved (return data), such as specific variables and stack pointers to restore the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 308, a checksum value for the specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 308 is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power status is set to "normal."

Next, the details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 23, will be described using FIG. 24. This figure is a flowchart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2001 that is executed first, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 0, the process advances to step S2002, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 0, the process advances to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2003, the value of the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2004, the timer for determining disconnection is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is not 1, the disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is any error status, the disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal number control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is ended.

Next, the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2101 that is executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control section 350 is on, the process advances to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2102, information in the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal number control unit 350. These commands include six types of medal number control status commands (FIG. 11) and response commands (FIG. 13(b)), and the type of command can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the type of command is identified by referring to the upper byte of the received command, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2104, and if there is any error status, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command that includes an error code (an error code in the medal number control unit 350), the error code is set to the error status. Note that if there is no error in the medal number control unit 350, an error code indicating normality will be set in the error status, but in this case, there will be no error status.

Next, the details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. This figure is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 10) is repeatedly incremented by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (41 is followed by 1). In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 10, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent in sequence from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Among the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, the last command (41st transmitted command) is a check generated based on the transmitted contents of the previous commands. It has become Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset reaches 41, the checksum updated up to that point is sent to the medal number control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are output to the medal number control unit 350 (the I/O output port is updated). Note that the information output here is received by the medal number control unit 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209, which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is off. If the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is off, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is set to ON, and the game control state command transmission process is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are cleared, and the process advances to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal number control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

《Medal number control section main processing》
Next, the medal number control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal number control section.

As described above, the medal number control section 350 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 which has received this activation signal performs a reset start by the reset interrupt and executes the medal number control unit main processing shown in FIG. 27 in accordance with the control program stored in advance in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, a power-on process is performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and the interrupt cycle is set. be done. Furthermore, communication circuit settings, etc. are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. Note that details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later using FIG. 28.

In step S303, a preparation process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Details of this preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

In step S304, a gaming machine information notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S305. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 32.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S306. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 34.

In step S306, a process for confirming receipt of the loan notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S307, if the loan notification receipt flag is on, proceed to step S308, and if the flag is off, proceed to step S304 again.

In step S308, the process of sending a loan acceptance result response is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304 again. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

Next, the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 28. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3001 that is executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process advances to step S3002, and if the power status is other than "normal", the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in the RAM 358, and the process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power outage. If these values are the same, the checksum value is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. If these values are different, the checksum value is determined to be abnormal and the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3004, a normal RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processes, and as shown in FIG. 29, the normal RAM clear process has the fewest targets to be cleared. In addition to an area for storing information during gameplay, RAM 358 also has an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information regarding the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous zones, and a buffer for temporarily storing information received from the game control unit 302, but the normal RAM clear process mainly clears the area for storing information during gameplay.

In step S3005, the full RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. Of the four types of RAM clear process, the full RAM clear process clears the largest number of areas, and clears the entire area as shown in FIG. 29.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM defective" is stored as RAM defect information, and the process advances to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process advances to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the game medal count clear button 172 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process advances to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detection has occurred" is set as the game medal count clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeated until a strobe signal ON from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when a strobe signal ON is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not a game control unit RAM clear command, one of the game control priority commands shown in FIG. 13(a), has been received. If this command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3017; if not, the process proceeds to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command indicates clearing is "normal", the process advances to step S3018, and if the information does not indicate "normal", the process advances to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 29, the area excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 29, the area excluding chip information etc. is cleared.

In step S3020, if information indicating "RAM defect" is stored as RAM defect information, the process advances to step S3021; if information indicating "RAM defect" is not stored as RAM defect information, this RAM abnormality determination process is ended. do.

In step S3021, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, an error request setting process is executed. Details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

Next, the details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process etc. in FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. 30. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 28 etc.

First, in step S3101 that is executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code has already been set, the error request setting process is ended.

In step S3102, the value of the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 9(b), the process advances to step S3104; otherwise, the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3104, the rental device communication abnormality error setting flag is set to on, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 9(b), the process advances to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and this error request setting process ends.

Next, the details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. This figure is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, the rental device communication anomaly counter is set to an initial value (5 in this embodiment).

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of the medal count control unit 350 is updated. This information is stored in the ROM of the medal control unit.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeated while the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on, and when the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3206, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 27 will be explained using FIG. 32. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3301, which is executed first, this process is repeated until the gaming machine information notification interval timer value reaches 0, at which point the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 300.98 ms in this embodiment).

In step S3303, the count notification interval timer is set to a value equivalent to 90 ms.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 33.

In step S3306, preparations are made to transmit various gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, preparations are made to send the gaming machine performance information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, preparations are made to send the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine information type is prepared to be sent. If the value of the machine information type is 2, preparations are made to transmit hole control/fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process advances to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process advances to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to 0.

In step S3309, the value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to zero.

In step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various pieces of gaming machine information (message length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see Figures 8(a) and 8(b)) corresponding to the gaming machine information type prepared for transmission in step S3306 are sequentially transmitted. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the contents transmitted up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by one within the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification sending process of FIG. 32 will be described using FIG. 33. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 32.

First, in step S3401, which is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3403, the gaming machine information type is set to 1, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

In step S3404, the gaming machine information type is set to 2, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is ended.

In step S3406, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3407, the gaming machine information type is set to 0, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

Next, details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described using FIG. 34. This figure is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3501 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, the rental notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment).

In steps S3503 to S3505, the message length, command type, and counting number are sent sequentially to the rental device 700.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3508, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S3513. This VL signal is a signal that is always in an on state and is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 if it is normal.

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is not 0, proceed to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, proceed to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511, and if the number of medals to be counted is less than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3512.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for counting determination is set to the number of medals to be counted.

In step S3512, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number is sent to the rental machine 700.

In step S3514, the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the value of the counted number is added to the cumulative number of medals.

In step S3518, the cumulative number of medals is transmitted to lending machine 700.

In step S3519, the checksum is transmitted to rental machine 700. Note that the checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the rental machine 700 in this count notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described using FIG. 35. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3601 that is executed first, if the rental notification reception flag is off, the process advances to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

In step S3602, if the value of the lending notification interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3603, and if the same value is not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the signal is off, the lending notification reception confirmation process is terminated. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent in the on state from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S3604, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

Next, the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36. This figure is a flowchart of the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3701, which is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the rental device communication error counter.

In step S3702, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to OFF.

In step S3703, if the loan quantity receipt result is "normal", proceed to step S3704, and if it is other than "normal", proceed to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the loan serial number is set to the normal loan serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the lending serial number is set in the checking lending serial number. The confirmation lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 39), and step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation loan serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the confirmation loan serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

In steps S3707 to S3711, the following information is sent to the rental device 700 in sequence: message length, command type, normal rental serial number, rental quantity receipt result, and checksum. Note that the checksum is an updated value based on the previously sent content.

In step S3712, if the loan quantity receipt result is "normal", proceed to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", end the loan receipt result response sending process.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission from step S3707 to step S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals, and the loan receipt result response sending process is terminated.

《Medal number control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the medal number control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal number control section 350 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the medal number control section timer interrupt processing.

The medal count control unit 350 is equipped with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 0.745 ms), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start medal count control unit timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S402, the WDT is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 0.745 ms, which is the period of the medal count control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the WDT count value from exceeding the initial setting value and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality).

In step S403, input port status update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port status update process, the input contents for the I/O input ports are stored in the signal status storage area in the RAM 358.

In step S404, rental notification reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 38.

In step S405, processing for updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 40.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 41.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is performed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S408, a medal number control command transmission process to the game control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 53.

In step S409, the display unit display process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed to update various timers according to their respective time units.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (a power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the medal number control section shown in FIG.

Meanwhile, in step S413, information that needs to be saved (return data), such as specific variables and stack pointers to return to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 358, a checksum value for a specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 358 is derived and stored in RAM 358, and the power status is set to "normal." Note that the game control unit 302 also executes a similar process (step S214 in FIG. 23) when it detects a power outage, but if the process ends before the process on the game control unit 302 side ends, it will not be possible to receive commands from the game control unit 302. To prevent such problems from occurring, this embodiment employs a circuit configuration in which the process ends after the process on the game control unit 302 side ends.

Next, using FIG. 38, details of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4001 that is executed first, the lending notification reception flag is set to OFF.

In step S4002, if a rental notification is received from the rental machine 700, the process advances to step S4003, and if not received, this rental notification reception process is ended.

In step S4003, information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notification. That is, the data included in the lending notice is stored in the RAM 358.

In step S4004, a loan number determination process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 39.

In step S4005, the result of the determination in step S4004 is set as the number of loaned sheets received.

In step S4006, the loan notification receipt flag is set to on, and the loan notification receipt process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 39, details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification receiving process of FIG. 38 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 38.

First, in step S4101 that is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the data of the received rental notification.

In step S4103, the value of the checksum included in the received lending notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the two are different, the number of borrowed sheets is determined. Finish the process.

In step S4104, the value of the loan serial number contained in the received loan notification is compared with the value of the confirmation loan serial number stored in RAM 358. If the two are equal, the process proceeds to step S4105. If the two are different, the loan quantity determination process is terminated. Note that if the previous loan notification was received normally, the confirmation loan serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 36 (the updated loan serial number from the previous time).

In step S4105, if the message length and command type information of the received loan notification correspond to the loan notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106; otherwise, the loan quantity determination process is terminated.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of loaned sheets included in the received loan notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the number of game medals is less than 15,000, the process proceeds to step S4108, and if the number is 15,000 or more, the lending number determination process ends.

In step S4108, it is determined whether the gaming machine information type value of the previously sent gaming machine information notification was 2, i.e., whether the gaming machine information notification was about hall control/fraud monitoring information. If the gaming machine information type value is 2, the process proceeds to step S4109, and if the value is not 2, the lending number determination process is terminated.

In step S4109, if the value of the counted number in the previously transmitted counting notification is 0, the process advances to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 50 or less, the process advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the process of determining the number of rental sheets ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and this lending number determination process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 40, details of the scheduled number of tokens to be counted update process (step S405) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the scheduled counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4201, which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the process ends the update process for the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S4203, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S4213. In addition, this VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the rental machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state if it is normal.

In step S4203, if the count button 171 is being operated, proceed to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, proceed to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the count long press timer is 0, the process advances to step S4206, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4206, the value of the counting long press timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 500 ms), and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, the process advances to step S4208, and if the same value is not 1, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the planned count number is set to 50, and the planned count number update process is terminated.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was operated immediately before (the count button 171 was released), the process advances to step S4211, and otherwise, this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is off, proceed to step S4212, and if the flag is on, proceed to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

In step S4213, the count long press flag is set to OFF.

In step S4214, the count long press timer value is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the planned count is cleared (set to 0), and the planned count update process is terminated.

Next, details of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be explained using FIG. 41. This figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4301 that is executed first, if switching from OFF to ON of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, the process advances to step S4302, and in other cases, this game control unit command reception processing end.

In step S4302, the game control command disconnection timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 190 ms in this embodiment).

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control status command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not a game control status command (it is a game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305.

In step S4304, gaming control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 42.

In step S4305, a game control priority command reception process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 43.

Next, the details of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception process in FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. This figure is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process advances to step S4404, and if the received command is any other command, the process advances to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, and a check is made in which the last command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. This is a command to send a thumb. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process advances to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process advances to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the contents of the received command, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated according to the contents of the 1st to 40th commands in step S4403 is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the gaming control unit 302, and if the two are equal, it is considered normal. It is determined, and the process advances to step S4405, and if the two are different, this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, the value of the gaming machine state information buffer (the value of the gaming machine state information shown in FIG. 6(a)) among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquisition chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in RAM 358 matches the acquired chip ID acquired in step S4408, the process proceeds to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4410, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 6(c)) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358. Steps S4411 and S4412 set the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6(b) in RAM 358.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

Next, the details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process in FIG. 41 will be described using FIG. 43 and FIG. 44. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S4501 that is executed first, if a triple command is received, the process advances to step S4502, and if the command is other than the triple command, the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. 44. As mentioned above, a triple command is a command consisting of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in a row, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. is a triple command. That is, if the above triple command is received among the game control priority commands, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error occurrence command, RAM clear command, or start lever acceptance command other than these commands is received, the process proceeds to the step of FIG. 44. The process will proceed to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triplet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4504, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triplet command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. In other words, for commands excluding the last command, the process proceeds to step S4503, where their contents are stored in the receive buffer, and when the last command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 is compared with the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process advances to step S4507. If they are different, this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4507, if the game control command serial number update flag to be described later is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510.

In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to off.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is equal to the value of the gaming control command serial number (gaming control command serial number (command serial number for determination) updated in the previous S4511), step S4511 If the two are different, the process advances to step S4512.

In step S4511, the game control command serial number is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 44.

In step S4512, information indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" (error code E3) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4514 of FIG. 44, if the received command is a RAM clear command, proceed to step S4515; otherwise, proceed to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. Note that in this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process advances to step S4517; otherwise, the process advances to step S4518.

In step S4517, the command input reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, proceed to step S4519; otherwise, proceed to step S4520.

In step S4519, the settlement command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process advances to step S4521; otherwise, the process advances to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 47.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process advances to step S4523; otherwise, the process advances to step S4524.

In step S4523, the payout command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

In step S4523, error occurrence command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 51.

Next, the details of the input command reception process (step S4517) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. This figure is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4601, which is executed first, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process advances to step S4603, and if the flag is on, the input command reception process is ended.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands), the process advances to step S4605; otherwise, this input command Ends reception processing.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is added to the current bet value.

In step S4607, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception processing is ended.

Next, details of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be explained using FIG. 46. This figure is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4701, which is executed first, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the current bet.

In step S4702, if the current bet value is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is added to the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the settlement command reception process is terminated.

In step S4706, information indicating "settlement quantity mismatch" (error code E6) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and this settlement command receiving process is ended.

Next, the details of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. This figure is a flowchart of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4801 that is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the game interval abnormality timer is set to its initial value (a value equivalent to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 9(a)) is set as the type information setting value, and in the subsequent step S4805, the value of the received command (the current number of bets in the game control unit 302) is set as the count information setting value. Ru. Here, the set information is later included in gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S4806, the game information setting process is executed, and the start lever reception command reception process is terminated. Details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

In step S4807, information indicating "game interval abnormality" (error code E5) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this start lever reception command reception process is terminated.

Next, the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process in FIG. 47 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process in FIG. 49 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 48. This figure is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIG. 47 and FIG. 49.

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, the number of game play information items is incremented by 1.

In step S4902, if the number of pieces of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of pieces of game information is not 1 (is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 47 or step S4A14 in FIG. 49) is set as type information 1.

In step S4904, the count information setting value is set as count information 1, and this game information setting process is terminated. Note that here, if the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 47 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and if the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 49 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 47) is set as type information 2.

In step S4906, the count information setting value (the value set in step S4805 in FIG. 47) is set as count information 2, and this game information setting process is terminated.

The type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided in order to transmit information about both of them in case the game starts quickly after the payout (within the transmission cycle to the rental machine 700). It is something that That is, when payout information (step S4A14, etc. in FIG. 49) is set in type information 1 and count information 1, information on the current number of bets (step S4804, etc. in FIG. 47) is set in type information 2 and count information 2. may be set to . Note that from the start of the game to the payout, the reels are rotated and stopped, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be sent to the lending machine 700 (cleared), so the payout information is not the type information. 2 and count information 2 is never set.

Next, the details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. This figure is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4A01, which is executed first, the game medal count clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, proceed to step S4A03, and if the flag is off, proceed to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the player wins in the replay, the process advances to step S4A04, and if the player does not win in the replay, the process advances to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, the game medal count addition value is set to 0.

In step S4A05, information indicating "abnormal number of dispensed coins" (error code E4) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the three commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the same value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the number of medals to be paid out is set to the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A08, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands).

In step S4A09, information indicating "game sequence abnormality" (error code E2) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4A11, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 50.

In step S4A12, if the response command information indicates "normal," proceed to step S4A13; otherwise, end this payout command reception process.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

In step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 9(a)) is set as the type information setting value.

In step S4A15, if a replay win occurs, proceed to step S4A18; otherwise, proceed to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is set as the count information setting value. Note that the first command of the payout commands here includes the number of coins to be paid out by the gaming control unit 302, and this number of coins to be paid out is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is sent to the lending machine 700.

In step S4A17, the current bet amount is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current number of bets is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process shown in FIG. 48 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

Next, the details of the medal count overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process in FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 49.

First, in step S4B01, which is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is greater than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended.

In step S4B04, the number of game medals is set to the value of the addition result.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the game medal count overflow confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. This figure is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4C01, which is executed first, the error request is cleared. If an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal count control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error on the game control unit 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if the received command contains information indicating a "game control disconnection" (error code E1), proceed to step S4C08; otherwise, proceed to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating an "abnormal game sequence" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if information indicating "medal number control RAM error" (error code E8) is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, if the received command contains information indicating a "game control RAM failure" (error code rE), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the error command reception process ends.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and this error occurrence command reception process is ended. By setting this flag on, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 43).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described using FIG. 52. This figure is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4D01, which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information indicating "game control disconnection" (error code E1) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and the process advances to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the same value is not 1, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process advances to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D06, information indicating "rental machine communication abnormality" (error code E9) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and this error monitoring process is ended.

Next, the details of the medal count control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4E01, which is executed first, the VL signal information is updated.

In step S4E02, if the power-on flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4E03, and if the flag is on, the process of sending the medal count control command to the game control unit is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, if no response command to be sent to the game control unit 302 (a response command set in either the insert command receiving process in FIG. 45, the settlement command receiving process in FIG. 46, or the payout command receiving process in FIG. 49) has been set, the process proceeds to step S4E05, and if a response command has been set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal number control state command (six types of commands) described using FIG. 11 is repeatedly sent in order from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read to generate the transmission content, and this transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302. When transmitting the information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper and lower bytes and transmitted using two of the six types of commands, and the value used in this case is the number of game medals obtained when the earlier of the two commands was transmitted.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the insert command receiving process in FIG. 45, the settlement command receiving process in FIG. 46, or the payout command receiving process in FIG. 49 is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any of the input command reception processing of FIG. 45, the settlement command reception processing of FIG. 46, or the payout command reception processing of FIG. 49 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is less than or equal to 3, proceed to step S4E10, and if the value is greater than 3, proceed to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to on.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by 1. Note that this value is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 7 (7 is followed by 0).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are output to the game control unit 302, and the process of sending medal count control commands addressed to the game control unit is terminated. Note that the information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to on.

Next, the details of the display display process (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. This figure is a flowchart of the display display process (step S409) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4F01, which is executed first, if the value of the number of game medals played is different from the value of the number of game medals displayed, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if the two values are the same, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, the value of the number of game medals to be displayed is incremented by 1.

In step S4F05, the value of the number of game medals for display is subtracted by 1.

In step S4F06, a value equivalent to 4 ms is set to the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display display process is ended.

<<Variation 1>>
Here, a modified example of the medal insertion process (hereinafter, modified example 1) will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 57. Figure 55 is a modified example of the medal insertion process of Figure 17, Figure 56 is a modified example of the triple command transmission process of Figure 20, and Figure 57 is a modified example of the insertion command reception process of Figure 45.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 55, among the processes shown in FIG. 17, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 17 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input quantity limit flag is set to off.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 56, step S1402 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 20, and step S1421 is added. This process is described below.

In step S1421, the requested number and the input number limit flag are set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 57, step S4603 has been deleted from the process shown in FIG. 45. In addition, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 have been newly provided at the end of the route where the determination in step S4604 is No, and further, step S4608 has been deleted and step S4624 has been provided. These processes are described below.

In step S4621, the input quantity limit flag information contained in the received command (the first of the three commands) is referenced, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4622, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4623.

In step S4622, the value of the requested number of medals contained in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set as the number of medals to be played, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command among the three commands) is set to 0, and the process advances to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and the input command reception process is terminated.

《Modification 2》
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 2) of the scheduled count number update process will be described using FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 40.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 58, step S4204 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 40. Step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is added, and step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is added. These processes are described below.

In step S4221, the value of the long press timer is set according to the time that the count button 171 is pressed.

In step S4222, the planned number of coins to be counted is set according to the time the count button 171 is pressed.

《Modification 3》
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the scheduled count number update process will be described using FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 40.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 59, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the process shown in FIG. 40. In addition, new steps S4233 and S4234 are provided at the end of the route where the determination in step S4207 is No, and further steps S4235 and S4236 are provided before step S4210. In addition, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes are described below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic count timer is 0, proceed to step S4232, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds, and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic count timer is 1, proceed to step S4234, and if the value is not 1, proceed to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process advances to step S4210, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the value of the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic count flag is set to off, and the process of updating the planned count number is terminated.

<<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 60. Note that FIG. 60(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 60(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 60(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. This initialization process includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization of the storage area in RAM 408. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302. Details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60(d).

In step S509, a performance control process is performed. Here, the performance is prepared according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading the performance data from ROM 406, and updating the performance data if it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 contains a shutter control command, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using Figure 60 (b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 60(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 60(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, the device data set in step S515 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

Next, the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing in FIG. 60(a) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(d). This figure is a flowchart of the command processing (step S507) in FIG. 60(a).

First, in step S541 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S543; otherwise, this command processing is ended.

In step S543, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 61. Figure 61 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 61 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 61 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 61 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 61(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output port initial settings and the memory area in the RAM 508 are initialized, etc.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S609, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 61(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 61(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S611 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S621, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S625; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S625, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S631; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S631, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

《Operation explanation》
The operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be explained below.

[Operation when power is turned on]
In the medal number control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, the normal RAM clearing process is performed and the state returns to the state when the power was turned off (Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 28). Note that when the power is turned on for the first time, it is in the initial state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (No in step S3003 in FIG. 28). Furthermore, by storing information indicating "RAM failure" in the RAM failure information, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 28, and step S3102 in FIG. 30). This error information is sent to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 53), and an error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 25 and FIG. 16). Note that the game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350. Furthermore, by setting the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag to ON in the medal count control unit 350, various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit status command is received (Yes in step S3007 in FIG. 28 and step S4407 in FIG. 42).

In addition, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be sent from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 15). The medal count control unit 350 that receives this RAM clear command is configured to clear the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (determined as Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 28). In this case, the medal count control unit 350 allows interrupt processing once, and then prohibits interrupt processing when it receives a command from the game control unit 302 and performs subsequent processing, so that it is possible to reliably receive the RAM clear command and perform the processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 28). In addition, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while interrupts are permitted, counting processing by operating the count button 171 is not performed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 28).

In addition, in the medal count control unit 350, the medal count can be initialized by operating the medal count clear button 172 when the power is turned on (Yes judgment in step S3008 of FIG. 28). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the medal count clear detection information, and while this information is set, information regarding this clear is included in the gaming machine information notification and sent to the lending machine 700 (FIG. 32). Note that the medal count clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the gaming control unit 302 (step S4A01 of FIG. 49).

[Game control state command transmission (periodically transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)]
In the slot machine 100, 41 types of game control status commands (see FIG. 10) are transmitted to the medal count control unit 350. Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control status commands are set one by one in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit (determination of Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 26). However, if the game control priority command has been set in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit 350 first, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

After the game control status command or game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (Yes judgment in step S2208 in FIG. 26). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal count control unit 350 receives the command. The strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt process and the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared (No judgment in step S2208 in FIG. 26), but the output from the I/O port is maintained as it is. This makes it possible to more stabilize the reception of commands on the medal count control unit 350 side. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in the next interrupt process to send a new command (Yes judgment in step S2201 in FIG. 26). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is sent while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time an interrupt process is executed. Furthermore, while the transmission state lasts for 1.49 ms (however, the command output itself lasts for 2.98 ms), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 0.745 ms interrupt processes), which prevents the command from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but a game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority according to the game situation in the game control unit main process. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the game control command transmission process (FIG. 26), the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main process before the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is set in the transmission buffer), and this game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority to the game control state command. The game control priority command includes an insertion command associated with an insertion operation of a game medal, a settlement command associated with a settlement operation of the game medals currently set to the bet number, a start lever acceptance command associated with acceptance of a start lever operation, a payout command associated with the payout of a game medal, an error occurrence command associated with an error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with a RAM clear (FIG. 13(a)).

Of the game control priority commands, the insert command, settlement command, and payout command each consist of three commands. The first of these commands contains information about the number of target game medals, the second command contains the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command contains a checksum based on the contents of the first two commands. These commands are sometimes called triple commands because they are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands. Furthermore, the value of the upper byte of a triple command is a consecutive value.

If a response command is not received from the medal count control unit 350, or if the response command from the medal count control unit 350 contains information indicating a "request again," the command will be resent (No judgment at step S1308 in FIG. 19, No judgment at step S1310), but if the upper limit on the number of resends is exceeded, information indicating "abnormal" will be set as the response result from the medal count control unit 350 (No judgment at step S1302, step S1306).

Furthermore, if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information other than “request”, this information is set in the response result from the medal control unit, and the command sequence number is incremented by 1 (see Figure 19 steps S1311 and S1312).

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 by insert operation (transmission of insert command, etc.)]
When a medal insertion operation is performed, the number of medals required by this operation (requested number) is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 17). In this embodiment, two types of bet buttons, a 1-bet button and a MAX-bet button, can be used for insertion operation. When the MAX-bet button is operated, the number of medals required to set the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 17), and when the 1-bet button is operated, the requested number is set to 1 (step S1109 in FIG. 17). However, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the requested number is set to 0 by the insertion operation (No is determined in step S1106 in FIG. 17).

Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an input command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of coins (the first of the commands constituting the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 17, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process of the game control unit timer interrupt process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 26), the checksum is updated, and the upper byte data is added to 1. The command is added and updated to a value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command serial number (the second of the commands that make up the input command) is sent to the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt process When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 26), the checksum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. At the same time, a command consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum (the third of the commands composing the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 20). ~S1411, Figure 21). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

The input command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above-described flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the requested number of medals is added to the current bet value. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 17).

Note that if a replay role is won and a replay is awarded (the replay flag is on), the input command is not processed (No is determined in step S1104 of FIG. 17).

In addition, between sending the insertion command and receiving a response command from the medal count control unit 350, the insertion command will not be sent even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until the response command is received).

In addition, when the bet button is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1114 in FIG. 17), regardless of whether a response command to the insertion command is received or the content of the response command from the medal count control unit 350. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this command, it can execute a presentation corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payment operation (transmission of payment command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current number of bets is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medals set to the current number of bets can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the current bet value is set as the number of game medals (requested number) requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 of FIG. 17, step S1203 of FIG. 18).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the payment command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 18, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Next, the second and third commands that make up the settlement command are sent, but the process for these is the same as for the input command, so a description will be omitted.

A settlement command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the current value of the number of bets becomes 0. is set (Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 18).

In the above example, the current bet value becomes 0 after receiving the response command (if a response command indicating "normal" is received, the current bet value is subtracted). Therefore, in the state before receiving the response command, the value of the current bet number has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added to the number of game medals in the medal number control unit 350 that has received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If a response command indicating "normality" is not received, the current bet value will not be subtracted and an error will occur (No determination in step S1206 in FIG. 18), but this error can be avoided by some means. Then, since the value of the current number of bets is not subtracted, as a result, the number of medals increases by the amount that the number of game medals is added by the medal number control unit 350, and game medals are fraudulently acquired by the settlement operation. It turns out. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the value of the current number of bets is set to 0 before and after sending the settlement command, and a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command is not used). Note that in a configuration that does not use response commands, there is a risk that errors in the communication status may not be detected, but by using a configuration that uses response commands for input commands, errors in the communication status can be detected, so communication quality will not deteriorate. You can do it like this. Note that a command index may be managed between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350, and an error may be determined when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent operations based on incorrect information from being performed.

If the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command that includes information about the number of medals that exceeds the number of medals inserted, it may not accept the settlement and may display an error. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

If the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding 16, it may not accept the settlement and may result in an error. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16,384, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

Note that if a replay role is won and a replay is awarded (the replay flag is on), the settlement command processing described above is not executed (No is determined in step S1202 of FIG. 18).

In addition, when the settlement button 134 is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether a settlement command is sent or the contents of the response command from the medal count control unit 350 (step S1201 in FIG. 18). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this command, it can execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the settlement button 134.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is greater than or equal to the startable number, the upper byte data indicating that it is a start lever acceptance command and the lower byte data indicating the current bet value. A command consisting of (start lever acceptance command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 16). Furthermore, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 16). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a winning combination with a payout is won, the value of this payout number is set to the number of game medals requested for payout (requested number) (step S1602 in FIG. 22). Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating a payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). In this state, when the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (No judgment in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Subsequently, the second and third commands of the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since the processing is the same as the input command, the explanation will be omitted.

The payout command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 in FIG. 22). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute a performance corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals has overflowed and payout cannot be accepted, so a command indicating this state is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 22). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute an effect corresponding to the overflow. If the overflow state is not resolved, the payout command will be repeatedly resent, and the game will not be able to proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171. If the overflow state is resolved, an effect corresponding to the payout will be executed and the game will be able to proceed. In other words, if the game cannot proceed due to an overflow, the player can deal with it themselves without having to call a store clerk.

[Operation when medal count control command is received]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal count control unit 350 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S2101 in Figure 25), it identifies the type of command (game control status command (Figure 11) or response command (Figure 13 (b)) and updates the contents of RAM 308 according to the type of command (step S2102 in Figure 25). Note that the response commands to the deposit command, settlement command, and payout command refer to the contents updated here. Also, if the command received here includes an error code, then this error code is set as the error status of the game control unit 302, provided that an error status has not been set in the game control unit 302 (step S2104 in Figure 25).

[Medal count control command transmission (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal count control status commands (see FIG. 11) are transmitted to the game control unit 302. Specifically, the medal count control status commands are sequentially set one by one in the transmission buffer for the game control unit by the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of the medal count control unit 350 (step S408 in FIG. 37, FIG. 53) (Yes in step S4E04 in FIG. 53). However, if a response command has already been set in the transmission buffer for the game control unit 302, the medal count control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (No in step S4E04 in FIG. 53).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 53). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 53), the command will be received on the game control section 302 side. In addition, in managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that is incremented by 1 for each interrupt in the range of 0 to 7 is used, and when the strobe counter is between 0 and 3, it is set to on. It is set to off between 4 and 7 (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 53). Note that the transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 53). In other words, in the medal number control unit 350, one command is transmitted while eight interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every four interrupt processes. . In addition, while the transmission state continues for 2.98ms (0.745ms x 4 times), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (2 interrupt processing of 1.49ms), so the command It is possible to prevent omissions.

[Operation when receiving game control status command]
When the medal number control section 350 receives a command from the game control section 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 41), if this command is a game control state command, the game control state command reception process (FIG. 41) is performed. Step S4304 (FIG. 42) is executed.

Forty-one types of game control status commands (Fig. 10) are sent in sequence, of which the first through 40th commands are temporarily stored in a buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 of Fig. 42). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the contents are normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (steps S4406, S4410 to S4413 of Fig. 42). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, the role ratio monitor information buffer, and the gaming machine performance information buffer, this is executed only if the chip ID stored in the RAM matches the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer (Yes in step S4409 of Fig. 42). If the IDs do not match, an error code E7 is set as an error request (No in step S4409 of Fig. 42). Also, if an all-RAM clear is executed in the medal count control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM is cleared, so in this case, as an exception, the update process is executed without checking the chip ID as described above (the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on in FIG. 28, and the determination in step S4407 in FIG. 42 is No).

[Operation when game control priority command is received]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S4301 in Figure 41), if the command is a game control priority command, it executes a game control priority command receiving process (step S4305 in Figure 41, Figures 43 and 44).

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error occurrence command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 44).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (insertion command, settlement command, and payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 43), and if it is the third command, the checksum value contained in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer, and if there is an abnormality, information indicating a "request again" is sent as a response command (steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 43).

Next, if the gaming control command serial number update flag is on, the gaming control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the gaming control command serial number updating flag is set to off (Fig. 43 (Yes determination in step S4507). Note that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation in which an error in the command serial number occurs separately after the error has been resolved (FIG. 51).

Next, it is determined whether the game control command serial number matches the command serial number stored in the receiving buffer (step S4510 in FIG. 43). Since the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S1312 in FIG. 19, step S4511 in FIG. 43), these values will match if there are no abnormalities. If these values do not match, error code E3 is set to an error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 43).

After the above processing, the processing corresponding to each command is executed (Figure 44).

[Operation when receiving a submission command]
If the received game control priority command is an insertion command, an insertion command reception process is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 44, FIG. 45). In this process, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter, the requested number of insertions) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of insertions is added to the number of insertion medals, the requested number of insertions is added to the current bet number, the requested number of insertions is subtracted from the number of game medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 45). If the requested number of insertions is greater than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormal" is set in the response command (No in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 45). The value of the number of insertion medals is a value used in the game machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32).

Note that while the count notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to ON (step S3509 in FIG. 34), and if this flag is ON, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command (No in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 45).

[Operation when settlement command is received]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, a settlement command reception process is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 44, FIG. 46). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter, the settlement request number) is subtracted from the current bet number (step S4701 in FIG. 46). Then, if the value of the current bet number is 0, the settlement request number is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the settlement request number is added to the number of game medals, and information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4702 in FIG. 46). The value of the inserted medal number is a value used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32). If the current bet number is not 0, an error code E6 is set as an error request (No in step S4702 in FIG. 46).

[Operation when start lever reception command is received]
If the received game control priority command is a start lever reception command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 47). If this flag is not set to ON, an error occurs in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 47), an initial value is set to the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 47), and further, a process for setting game information is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 47). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value, which is a value indicating the reception of the start lever. In addition, the current bet number is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by the reception of the start lever is stored as game information. Incidentally, the game information is information used for the game machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of this information is initialized each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 32). If the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, an error code E5 is set as an error request (determined as No in step S4802 in FIG. 47). This game interval abnormality timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter in the game control unit 302 (step S106 in FIG. 15), but this timer is also used in the medal count control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302 to prevent fraud.

[Operation when receiving a payout command]
If the received game control priority command is a payout command, first the game medal number clear detection information is cleared. This information is set by operating the game medal number clear button 172 when the power is turned on, but the configuration is such that this information is sent to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when this payout command is received. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, error code E2 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4A02 of FIG. 49). This flag is set to ON when the start lever reception command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever reception command has not been received. Used to prevent fraud.

Next, if a replay win has been won, the game medal number addition value is set to 0 (step S4A04 in FIG. 49). In cases other than a replay win, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter, the payout number) is 15 or less, the payout medal number and game medal number addition value are set to the payout medal number, respectively (steps S4A07 and S4A08 in FIG. 49). The payout medal number value is a value used in the gaming machine information sent to the rental machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is sent (step S3309 in FIG. 32). If the payout number is greater than 15, error code E4 is set as an error request (No is determined in steps S4A05 and S4A06 in FIG. 49).

Subsequently, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 49, FIG. 50). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the additional value of the number of game medals is less than or equal to 16383, which is the upper limit for the number of game medals for payout, this total value is set as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. The information is set (Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit for the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50). In addition, regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as described later (see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control unit 350)]), in actual operation, the number of game medals is equal to the actual threshold value. If it exceeds the actual threshold value, it cannot be increased by dispensing (response command ``abnormal''), and if it does not exceed the actual threshold value, it can be increased by dispensing (response command ``normal''). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment); for example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process.

If information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process ends and this response command is sent to the game control unit 302.

On the other hand, if the response command is set to information indicating "normal", the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 49). Furthermore, a process for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 49). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, which indicates that a payout has been made. The number of medals paid out (the current number of medals bet in the case of a replay win) is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of medals obtained by the payout is stored as game information. The game information is used in the game machine information sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of information is initialized each time the game machine information is sent (step S3310 in FIG. 32).

[Gaming machine information notification (periodically transmitted from medal count control unit 350 to rental machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal count control unit main process (step S304 in FIG. 27, FIG. 32). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at intervals of about 300 ms by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301, S3302 in FIG. 32). In addition, a count notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the count notification executed after the transmission of this gaming machine information notification is set to 90 ms (step S3303 in FIG. 32).

Then, the current number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (transfer of the number of game medals from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 32).

Next, the gaming machine information type is obtained (step S3305 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of the three types of gaming machine information is selected as the gaming machine information: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information (FIG. 8(b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, hall control/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer, 0, 1, or 2 is set as the gaming machine information type (FIG. 33). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at approximately 60-second intervals, the gaming machine information type is set to 0 at approximately 180-second intervals, and otherwise the gaming machine information type is set to 2. That is, in the gaming machine information notification with a cycle of about 300 ms, the gaming machine information mainly includes hall control and fraud monitoring information, but the gaming machine information includes gaming machine installation information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the gaming machine information includes gaming machine performance information at intervals of about 180 seconds. The data that is the subject of the gaming machine information notification (FIGS. 8(a)(b)), including the gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type, is set in the transmission buffer for the loaned machine (step S3306 in FIG. 32) and transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 32). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 32).

In addition, the hole console/fraud monitoring information corresponding to gaming machine information type 2 includes gaming information according to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid out medals, and the number of gaming information, but this information is not sent to the lending machine. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 32).

[Count notification (periodically sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, a count notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main processing (step S305 in FIG. 27, FIG. 34). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms after the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 32, step S3501 in FIG. 34).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data to be notified of the counting (FIGS. 8(a) and 8(c)) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the rental machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 34). , S3519). Note that the counting sequence number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 34).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted, but if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (No determination in step S3508 in FIG. 34, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, if the number of tokens to be counted is set to a value other than 0, the number of tokens to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 34), and the number of game medals is further subtracted (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 34). step S3514). Note that the setting of the number of coins to be counted and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 34). The scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40).

[Setting the planned number of medals to be counted (medal count control unit 350)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a process for updating the planned number of medals to be counted is executed by the medal count control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40). The number of medals to be counted is determined based on the planned number of medals to be counted set in this process, and a counting notification including this information is sent to the lending machine 700.

First, a case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 40), but since the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer reaches 1 (500 ms have passed since it was pressed), the count The long press flag is not set to on (Yes is not determined in step S4207 of FIG. 40). When the counting button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (Yes in step S4210 of FIG. 40, step S4212).

Next, a case where the count button 171 has been pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, the count long press timer is set to an initial value (step S4206 in FIG. 40), and when the value of the timer reaches 1 (500 ms has elapsed since pressing), the count long press flag is set to ON and the planned count number is set to 50 (Yes in step S4207 in FIG. 40). Thereafter, while the count button 171 is being pressed with the count long press flag on, the process of setting the planned count number to 50 is repeated, and the count number based on this planned count number is set each time a count notification is sent. On the other hand, when the count button 171 is released with the count long press flag on, the count long press flag is set to OFF, the count long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the planned count number is cleared (Yes in step S4210 in FIG. 40, No in step S4211).

[Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a loan notification from the loaner machine 700, the contents of the RAM are updated based on the contents of the loan notification (step S4003 in FIG. 38). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the loan notification matches the checksum included in the loan notification (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 39). Next, it is determined whether the confirmation loan serial number of the medal count control unit 350 matches the loan serial number included in the loan notification (step S4104 in FIG. 39). The confirmation loan serial number holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the loan serial number included in the previously received loan notification (step S3706 in FIG. 36), and is configured to match these if the communication is normal. Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined in these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above judgment, if the number of loaned sheets included in the loan notification is 0, the judgment result is set to "normal" (Yes judgment in step S4106 of FIG. 39). On the other hand, if the number of loaned sheets is not 0, the following judgment is further executed (No judgment in step S4106 of FIG. 39).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4107 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, it is configured so that if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, it cannot be increased by lending, and if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it can be increased by lending. In order to realize this operation, for example, even if a process is adopted in which an increase by lending is restricted if the number is 15,000 or more, and an increase by lending is possible if the number is 14,999 or less, the operation will be the same as in this embodiment. In addition, even if an increase by lending is possible if the number is 14,999 or less, and an increase by lending is restricted in other cases, the operation will be the same as in this embodiment. As described above, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold (14,999 in the above case), the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, the number can be increased by lending. As long as there is a value that is the actual threshold, any process can be used for the judgment process and judgment value (15,000 in this embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold does not have to be the same as the judgment value in the process.

The above determination may also be made based on the number of game medals that would result if added, rather than the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a real threshold value that includes the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. In other words, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the real threshold value, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if the number does not exceed the real threshold, the number can be increased by lending.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4108 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, the system is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2.

Next, if the counted number is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4109 in FIG. 39). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of loaned medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added, so this embodiment is configured so that these processes do not coexist.

Finally, if the number of sheets lent is greater than 50, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4110 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets lent at one time is set to 50.

If the above determination does not indicate an abnormality, the determination result is set to "normal" (Yes determination in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 39).

The result of the above process is set as the loan quantity receipt result, and the loan notification receipt flag is set to on (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 38).

In addition to the above lending notification reception process, the medal number control section 350 executes a lending notification reception confirmation process in the medal number control section main processing (step S306 in FIG. 27, FIG. 35). In this rental notification reception confirmation process, it is confirmed whether the rental notification reception flag is on for 170ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 34, steps S3601 and S3602 in FIG. 35). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification receiving process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S404 in FIG. 37, FIG. 38).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the rental notification reception flag is not turned on by the time 170ms elapses from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( Step S3604 in FIG. 35). The value of this rental machine communication abnormality counter is initialized when executing the rental machine reception result response transmission (step S3701 in FIG. 36), but when the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter reaches 1, an error occurs (Fig. 52 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodically transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, after the lending notification reception confirmation process, if the lending notification reception flag is set to on, the lending reception result response transmission process is executed in the medal number control unit main processing (steps in FIG. 27). S308, Figure 36).

In this rental receipt result response sending process, parameters related to rental device communication abnormalities are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in Figure 36).

Subsequently, if the lending number receipt result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 36). Further, after the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set as the confirmation lending serial number, 1 is added to the value of the confirmation lending serial number (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 36). That is, the value of the confirmation lending serial number here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notice.

Subsequently, the data (FIGS. 3A and 3E) that is the object of the rental receipt result response is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the rental machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 36). Through the above process, if the result of receiving the number of borrowed sheets is "normal", the currently received loan serial number will be sent; if the result of receiving the number of loaned sheets is "abnormal", the previously received loan serial number will be sent. . Note that if the result of receiving the number of loaned medals is "normal", the value of the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 36).

[Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 judges various errors (step S203 in FIG. 23). For example, if the strobe signal at the time of command transmission from the medal count control unit 350 is not detected for a certain period of time, a medal count control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 24). In a state where the error status is not set in the game control unit 302, the error status is set based on the error code of the medal count control unit 350. When the error status is set, a process of notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 16, step S1603 in FIG. 22). For this reason, an error on the game control unit 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal count control unit 350 side, and for example, if there is no error on the game control unit 302 side, an error on the medal count control unit 350 side is notified. In addition, the error status is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 by an error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 23).

[Operation in response to error (medal number control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, when it is determined that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 28, step S4414 in FIG. 42, step S4512 in FIG. 43, step S4706 in FIG. 47, Step S4807, Step S4A05 in FIG. 49, Step S4A09 in FIG. 49, Step S4D02 in FIG. 52, Step S4D06 in FIG. 52, and FIG. 30). This error code information is transmitted to the game control section 302 by a medal number control state command. Note that when an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 51). Thereby, the configuration is such that an error on the game control section 302 side is processed more preferentially than an error on the medal number control section 350 side.

[Modified example of input operation]
55 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 17, FIG. 56 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 20, and FIG. 57 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 45. be. The operations performed by these processes will be described below.

In the process of inserting medals in FIG. 17, the requested number of medals is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current number of bets, and an insert command including this information is sent to the medal number control unit 350. (Figure 20). On the other hand, in FIG. 55, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the number-of-insertion limit flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 55), and the 1 bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If so, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 55). Then, an input command including information on the input number limitation flag is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (FIG. 56).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 57, if there is a number of game medals greater than or equal to the requested number, this requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet amount, and the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is The response command is returned to the game control unit 302 (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 57). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 55).

In the input command reception process of FIG. 57, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the requested number, the input number limitation flag is referred to (No determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57). If the input number limitation flag is on, no processing is performed on the requested number of coins, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (No determination in step S4621 in FIG. 57). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds 0, which is the value returned by this response command, to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 55), so the current number of bets is maintained without changing. It turns out.

In the insert command reception process in FIG. 57, if there are no more game medals than the requested number and the input number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the requested number (Yes is determined in step S4621 in FIG. 57, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, and the number of game medals is subtracted to 0. The value of the number of game medals before the subtraction (the value set in the received command) is then returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command. The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 55).

In the above modified example, when the number of game medals available to correspond to the number requested in the input command is insufficient, if the input limit flag is on, 0 is returned for the requested number, and if the input limit flag is off, the maximum number currently available is returned for the requested number. With this configuration, when the medal count control unit 350 cannot accommodate the number requested by the game control unit 302, it switches between not accommodating and accommodating as much as possible, and transmits information for this distinction (input limit flag) along with the requested number. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the current number of bets, it may be possible to prevent the current number of bets from unintentionally becoming an unfavorable value.

In this embodiment, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the required number of coins is set to a value required to set the maximum number of coins to bet. However, the required number may be set to a fixed value such as the maximum number of coins to bet or another value.

For example, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which the maximum bet number is set as the required number of coins, if the 1 bet button 130 is operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. When an input command is transmitted with the maximum bet number as the requested number, the medal number control unit 350 does not accept this requested number (exceeds the maximum bet number). In this case as well, there will be a case where the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302. In such cases, by sending the information for proper usage and the requested number of sheets together, you can choose between an action that does not correspond to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and an action that corresponds to the requested number of sheets as much as possible (for example, returning 0 as a response command). For example, it is possible to use a command that returns the maximum bet amount as a response command.

《Operation example》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Example of operation related to counting process]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 62(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 62(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), time passes from left to right. Note that the same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), arrows are marked with symbols corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 62(b). These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170.

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), the timing at which a counting notification is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is indicated as "counting timing." This counting timing occurs at a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The counted number (the number of gaming values sent to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Also, below the "counted number," the value of the "number of gaming medals" stored in RAM 358 is shown. Further below that, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 62, the operation of the count button 171 is started when the "game medal count" is 250. As shown in FIG. 62(b)(i), the number "250" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Even when the first counting timing arrives after starting the operation of the counting button 171, the counting button 171 remains operated. Eventually, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the start of the operation of the counting button 171. Even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the counting button 171 continues to be operated, becomes a long-press operation, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 sheets (step S4209 of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 40). ). In the following description, operating the counting button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more will be referred to as a long press, and operating the counting button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting the operation will be referred to as a short press. The scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. It continues to be overwritten with the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, when the first counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "250" is subtracted by "1". This change display is performed by displaying numbers subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals by the display display process shown in FIG. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 suddenly changes from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. Display (a display that is performed before displaying the number of game medals after the reduction of 50 medals, and a display that makes it clear that the number of game medals is changing) is performed. Then, when about 200 ms have elapsed, the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 62(b).

When the count button 171 is pressed and held and the next counting timing arrives, the count number is again set based on the value of the number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is again sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "game medal count" is reduced by 50 medals to 150 medals. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal count display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "200" is subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Then, after approximately 200 ms has passed, the game medal count display device 170 displays the number "150" as shown in (v) of FIG. 62(b).

Furthermore, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is the 50 medals. The number decreases to 100 pieces. It is assumed that the counting button 171 is subsequently released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-press operation of count button 171 ends. In this case, since the value of the number of sheets to be counted (here, 50 sheets) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the "number of game medals" also remains at 100. Furthermore, since the change display is performed in a shorter time (approximately 200 ms) than the counting timing of 300 ms, after the player visually confirms the number after 50 medals have been reduced, if he/she wishes to keep that number of game medals, , by ending the operation of the counting button 171, that number of game medals can remain.

In addition, if the count button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after operation of the count button 171 is started (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow A shown in FIG. 62(a)), one coin is added to the value of the number of coins to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 40), and when the counting timing arrives, that one coin is sent as a counting notification. The "number of game medals" decreases by one to 249 coins, and the number "249" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

In addition, if the counting button 171 is operated multiple times after the first operation of the counting button 171 is started and before the first counting timing arrives, that is, if the counting button 171 is pressed multiple times before the counting timing arrives. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by 1 each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the counting timing arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (corresponding to the number of single presses in this case), and the value of the number of short presses so far is transmitted as a count notification.

On the other hand, if the count button 171 is released 0.5 seconds after the start of operation and before the first count timing arrives (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow B shown in FIG. 62(a)), even if the value of the number of medals to be counted is set to 50, this is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 40, so that a count notification of 50 medals is not sent and the "count" value becomes 0 medals (a count notification with the number of medals counted being 0 is sent). Similarly, if the count button 171 is released before the next count timing arrives after the display on the game medal count display device 170 changes from 250 medals to 200 medals over a period of about 200 ms (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow C shown in FIG. 62(a)), a count notification of 50 medals is not sent and the "count" value becomes 0 medals (a count notification with the number of medals counted being 0 is sent).

FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a first example of the effect when counting is being performed.

Figure 63 shows the performance image display device 157 and the speaker 272. As described above, the security command sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of counted coins.

When the count button 171 is pressed briefly to count one coin, the effect image display device 157 does not display any indication that counting is taking place, and if, for example, a game background display is displayed, that display continues. Also, no counting sound is output from the speaker 272. For example, if an effect sound corresponding to the game background display is output, that output continues. If a counting sound is output for a small number, it may mix with other effect sounds, giving the player a sense of expectation different from the sense of expectation that the other effect sounds were intended to express, so in the first example, no counting sound is output. If a counting sound is output for a large number, the output time is longer, so there is less risk of it mixing with other effect sounds, and it has less impact on other effect sounds. Note that, even if a small number such as two coins is counted, the counting sound may not be output in the same way as when one coin is counted.

On the other hand, when the count button 171 is pressed and held down and 50 coins are counted, a display notifying the user that counting is taking place is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. That is, as described above, the security command sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of coins being counted. When information indicating 50 coins is sent as the number of coins being counted, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound. Also, when information indicating 50 coins is sent as the number of coins being counted via the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 displays a counting in progress notification.

Furthermore, as the long press continues and 50 sheets are being counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound of "piyo piyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or more. Since the length of the counting sound that is output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected to the counting sound that is output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and it sounds as if it is being output continuously. For example, if the counting sound is longer than 0.5 seconds, it will overlap with the counting sound that is output at the next 50 sheet counting timing, and continuity will be maintained, and the counting sound will not be output during consecutive counting periods. Continue without interruption. Continuous counting is recognized by the text display "Continuous counting" and continuous counting sounds.

Note that when the number of sheets counted exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 sheets) of 2 or more and less than 50 sheets, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long press may be output. By doing this, for example, if a short press is repeated, it is possible to recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, if the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 is pressed for a long time when less than 50 medals remain (for example, 10 medals remaining), 10 medals are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is only a little time remaining from the change in the performance sound.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. In this embodiment, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the value of the current number of bets does not change, but in this FIG. 64, if the current number of bets is not 0 when the counting button 171 is operated, counting processing is executed This is a modification example in which a settlement process (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrease to the number of game medals) is performed beforehand.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, the settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed. be exposed.

In Figure 64, the "current bet number" is shown, and below that, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further below that, the value of the counted number is shown, and at the very bottom, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX BET button 132 is operated, and the "current bet number" is 3 coins. The "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 is deducted by 3 coins in response to this bet operation, decreasing it from 68 coins to 65 coins. Eventually, the count button 171 is operated instead of the start lever 135. When the count button 171 is operated, the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171 is detected, and based on this rising edge detection, the number of coins bet is first returned to the "game medal number". As a result, the "current bet number" becomes 0, and the "game medal number" increases by 3 coins to 68. In other words, the state before the bet operation is returned to, and the previous bet operation is canceled. After this cancellation, the counting process is performed. The count button 171 is pressed and held, and when the counting timing arrives while the count button 171 is held, 50 coins are counted, and the "game medal number" decreases by 50 coins to 18 coins.

In this example, the current bet number can be returned to the "game medal number" by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1, but the number of game medals will change due to further counting processing. In this configuration, if you want to change only the current bet number, you can operate the settlement button 134. For example, if you want to change to a bet of 1 medal after betting 3 medals, you can operate the settlement button 134 to temporarily return the bet of 3 medals to the "game medal number", and then operate the bet button 130 for betting 1 medal again to set the current bet number to 1 medal. Note that since the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

FIG. 65 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information representing the number of coins to be counted is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 from the game control unit 302 in a security command. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets that are included in the security command and is sent until the number of sheets that is sent becomes 0, at which point it becomes 0 (when counting ends). Execute the counting end effect with . The counting end performance here is a performance according to the number of counts to be performed at one time.

Figure 65 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect that is performed when the cumulative count number is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 1000). During counting, the effect image display device 157 performs a counting effect (e.g., the text display "Continuous counting in progress" and the output of a counting sound as described using Figure 63), and when counting ends, counting end effect 1 is performed in which the text display "Counting ended" is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

On the other hand, FIG. 65(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a counting end performance performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets) or more. When the counting of more than a predetermined number of coins is completed, counting end effect 2 is performed, and in addition to the character display of ``Counting completed'', a warning display of ``Be careful not to save too much'' is added to the effect image display device 157.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear. Therefore, it is desirable that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals." Therefore, it is preferable to provide notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171. The alert display described using FIG. 65(b) is an example of a notification that increases the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and urges the lending machine 700 to appropriately transfer gaming value. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative number of sheets counted. For example, if the cumulative count is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative count exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect B is performed. shall be carried out. Further, counting performance A is a performance that gives an impression of being in an appropriate state, and counting performance B is a performance that gives an impression of being in an inappropriate state. A large cumulative number of coins may give an unfavorable impression to the player.

Here, we will explain the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated.

Figure 66 is a timing chart showing an example of when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In conventional slot machines, real medals are loaned to players, and credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the bet amount is set using the credits. In such conventional slot machines, the settlement process for real medals includes not only the medals that have been bet, but also the medals that have been stored (for example, the settlement process is performed for 53 medals, which is the total of the maximum number of medals bet (3) and the maximum number of medals that can be stored (50)). When this settlement process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process to display a demo screen on the performance image display device 157. In other words, there is a certain amount of time while the settlement process, which may involve the ejection of physical medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs a performance related to the settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, the process transitions to a demo performance based on the demo command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, which does not require actual medals, the object of settlement is the medals that have been bet (current bet, maximum 3 medals), and since no physical medals are ejected, the processing time related to settlement is very short. For this reason, after the settlement button 134 is pressed, there is only a very short processing time related to settlement, and the demo command is output without delay to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, if a performance is executed based on the settlement process being executed, this performance will only be executed for a short time before the demo performance, which may actually make the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 66, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute any effect based on this settlement button command (such as outputting a settlement sound).

As shown in FIG. 66, when the bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated and the settlement operation is performed. As a result of this settlement operation, the number of betted medals (3 medals) is added to the "number of game medals" and becomes 68 medals from 65 medals.

Figure 66 shows the speaker 272 and the performance image display device 157. Even when a settlement operation is performed, no settlement sound is output from the speaker 272. In addition, the game background display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. The performance image display device 157 shown in Figure 66 immediately switches to a demo display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts a demo performance based on receiving a settlement button command (or a demo command immediately after the settlement button command). In this example, only the demo performance is executed at the start of the demo, making the start of the demo more clear.

In addition, the specification may be such that the payment performance is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While this payment performance is being executed, the payment performance is continued even if the demonstration performance has been started, so that both performances are executed. Although it is expected that the frequency of checkout operations will be lower than with conventional slot machines, there is a non-zero possibility that checkout operations will be carried out due to fraud (so-called cheating), so it is possible that there are checkout operations in the surrounding area. Let everyone know what happened.

Next, we will explain an example in which the number of sheets counted changes depending on the length of time the count button 171 is operated.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer. In this example, instead of the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 40, the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 58 is adopted.

Figure 67 (a) is a table showing the specific values of the count long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the planned count number update process shown in Figure 58. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press stage value. That is, between the long press stage value of 1 and 4, when the long press stage value increases, the value of the count long press timer decreases by a predetermined time (300 ms in this case). In other words, the value of the count long press timer is shortened in stages. And when the long press stage value is 4 or more, the value of the count long press timer becomes a constant value (300 ms in this case).

FIG. 67(b) is a table showing specific values of the number of sheets to be counted used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press stage value. That is, until the value of the long press stage value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press stage value increases, the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases in stages according to the operation time of the counting button 171. Note that even if the same value is set multiple times, the number of sheets to be counted will increase in stages. For example, even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30, etc., the result is a stepwise increase. When the long press step value is 4 or more, the number of sheets to be counted is a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

Figure 67 (c) is a timing chart showing counting using the count long press timer shown in Figure 67 (a) and the planned number of coins to be counted shown in Figure 67 (b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 67(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart is shown in which the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is represented as an ON state.

When the count button 171 is turned on from the OFF state, a count long press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the timer value becomes "1", 10 sheets are set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Then, when the count button 171 is kept on and the timer value becomes "0", a count long press timer with a long press step value of 2 (value for 0.9 seconds) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.9 seconds set in the count long press timer have elapsed, the 10 sheets set as the planned number of sheets to be counted will be counted every time the count timing arrives at 0.3 second intervals.

Eventually, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Subsequently, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long press step value of 3 is set (as shown in FIG. 58). Step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.6 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the count timing of 20 sheets will be 0. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" again while the count button 171 is still operated, 30 sheets are set as the planned number to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still ON, the count long press timer with a long press step value of 4 (a value for 0.3 seconds) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.3 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the number of sheets set as the planned number to be counted, 30, will be counted when the counting timing arrives.

Then, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Thereafter, a value of 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set on the count long press timer (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and 50 sheets is repeatedly set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). As a result, if the counting button 171 is maintained in the operated state, 50 sheets will be counted every time the counting timing arrives.

In the example described here, the longer the operation time of the count button 171, the shorter the value of the count long press timer becomes and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases; however, the longer the operation time of the count button 171, the longer the value of the count long press timer may become and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases, the longer the value of the count long press timer may become and the value of the number of sheets to be counted decreases, or the shorter the value of the count long press timer may become and the value of the number of sheets to be counted decreases.

In addition, the value set in the counting long press timer is gradually shortened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is gradually increased until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0. You can.

FIG. 68(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 67(c), after the long press stage value reaches 4, the value of the count long press timer becomes constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the number of medals to be counted becomes constant at the maximum 50 medals. This state may be continued until the value of the "number of medals played" stored in RAM 358 becomes 0, but if the number of medals played falls below a certain value (e.g., 300 medals), end-game processing may be executed. The end-game processing referred to here is processing in which the value of the count long press timer is increased and the value of the number of medals to be counted is decreased as the number of medals played decreases.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 68(a) displays the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the "number of game medals" is set to 299 with the scheduled number of medals to be counted set to 50. The "number of game medals" is less than a certain value (300 medals).

When the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 58). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58) and becomes longer.

When the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is still being operated, the planned number of sheets to be counted is now set to 30 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still in the ON state, the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and is lengthened again.

If the value of the count long press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and becomes even longer.

Then, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Note that a number less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted. Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is again set to the value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). Note that a value exceeding a value of 1.2 seconds (for example, a value of 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the count long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 68(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches 9, the player releases the counting button 171 and the counting button 171 becomes OFF. As a result, the counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final process described above, the number of medals being counted decreases stepwise, and the value of the count long press timer increases, reducing the chance of the "game medal count" becoming 0 unintentionally due to a delay in releasing the count button 171. If you wish to set the "game medal count" to 0, you can continue to operate the count button 171 until the display on the game medal count display device 170 becomes "0."

FIG. 68(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where, in the example shown in FIG. 67(c), a power outage occurs when 30 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 68(b), the count button 171 remains operated even after the power is interrupted and before it is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power interruption, power may be restored before the player releases the count button 171. Alternatively, some players may not release the count button 171 even after they know that the power has been interrupted. However, this is only to take into consideration the case where the count button 171 remains operated between the time the power is interrupted and the time it is restored, and it is not possible to know whether the count button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. If the count button 171 remains operated and power is restored, an ON signal is detected after the power is restored without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the count button 171. In this case, if an ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, the medal count control unit 350 sets the maximum number (50 in this example) as the number of medals to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Even if control is temporarily interrupted due to a power outage, the fact that the counting button 171 has been operated for a long period of time can be reflected after power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets may be set slightly smaller than the maximum number (for example, 30 sheets). Alternatively, the number of sheets to be counted at the time of power outage may be reset.

Further, although the explanation here has been about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the count long press timer. That is, if the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, the medal number control unit 350 sets the value for the shortest time (in this example, the value for 300 ms) as the value of the counting long press timer. (Step S4221 shown in FIG. 58).

FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing an example in which the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 59 is adopted.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the ON state remains ON, automatic counting will be performed even if you release your hand from the counting button 171, and the count will be counted for 0.3 seconds. Each time the timing comes, 50 pieces are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reduce the number of game medals to 0 with a hassle-free operation.

When automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal count display device 170 described with reference to FIG. 62(b) is not performed, and the displayed number on the game medal count display device 170 decreases in units of 50 medals. In the seven-segment display that is the game medal count display device 170, the change display in which one medal is subtracted at approximately 4 ms intervals may appear as if all seven segments are lit and some segments are slightly flashing due to afterimages. Furthermore, if the change display continues until the number of game medals in the "game medal count" becomes 0, it may actually make the current displayed number difficult to understand. Furthermore, players who select automatic counting often want the number of game medals in the "game medal count" to be 0, and there are cases where there is little need to display the change display to show the number being subtracted by one.

Since there is no player operation during the period when automatic counting is being performed, it is preferable to notify the player that automatic counting is being performed with a lamp or the like. Furthermore, if any payout is made based on the game result during automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. In other words, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358, and will be included in the counting from the next time onwards.

Figure 70 (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the "number of game medals" value stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value.

Automatic counting starts when 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the counting button 171 operation, and 50 medals are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 70(a), the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 is also written under the "counted medal number". In this example, the counting button 171 is released when the "game medal number" is around 147 medals, but the "game medal number" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "game medal number" falls below a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting ends automatically, and the "game medal number" will not decrease unless the counting button 171 is operated. Here, the remaining 47 medals remain without being automatically counted. If you want to continue playing after automatic counting, you can start playing promptly because there is a remaining number. There are also cases where you want to count all the game medals. To start counting again, operate the counting button 171 again. For example, if a long press operation for 0.5 seconds is performed, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. Note that, although the certain value is set to 50, the certain value may be set by the player. For example, the player may be able to select from 0, 20, and 50. After counting, the player can leave a desired number of game medals. Note that, a certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, in a normal game state, a certain value is set to 0, and in a bonus game state such as during AT play, a certain value is set to 50. In a bonus game state, since the possibility of ending the game is low, the game can be started promptly by leaving a certain amount of game medals. Note that, a certain value may be set according to the number of game medals automatically counted. For example, if the number of game medals counted is less than 100, a certain value is set to 0, and if the number of game medals counted is 100 or more, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, the purpose may be to exchange the counted number of game medals for prizes such as drinks, and game play may continue after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, game play can be started promptly. The opposite is also possible. If a large number of game medals are counted, the purpose may be to count them once a notification or the like is executed to encourage counting, and game play may be continued after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, game play can be started promptly.

Figure 70 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of when power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 70(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power outage occurs while 50 medals are being counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives due to automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of this power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is started during a power outage and the power is restored while it is being operated, After the power is restored, an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is detected. If this ON signal is detected at the time of power restoration, automatic counting is started even if 2 seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not elapsed. That is, when the first counting timing arrives after power is restored, 50 sheets are counted. Therefore, even if the user takes his hand off the counting button 171 before 2 seconds have passed after the power is restored, automatic counting is started.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example display indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 71 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 71 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the manner in which the counting button 171 is operated (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, characters "Counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. That is, the character display "Counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Further, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, a segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower side of FIG. 71 shows a state where automatic counting is being performed. When the medal number control unit 350 starts automatic counting, it sends a command to the game control unit 302 including automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting, in the counted number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 sends the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the above-mentioned automatic counting information in addition to the information representing the number of coins to be counted. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the text "Counting automatically" and a message 157m. Automatic counting status notification is performed while automatic counting is being performed. Note that while automatic counting is being performed, notification may be provided by sound or lamp. In FIG. 71, the words "Automatically counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. Further, below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as ``Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the button.'' In a state where automatic counting status notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, an explanation such as ``you can play games'' is also given. In a state where automatic counting state notification is being performed, notification that game progress is possible is performed. It is reported that it is possible to proceed with the game, such as operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132, even during automatic counting. Note that during the counting process, operations on the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted. In addition, since it is expected that there will be cases where you want to manually end automatic counting after automatic counting has started, if you operate the counting button 171 again after automatic counting has started, automatic counting will end. Good too. That is, when the medal number control unit 350 detects an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When automatic counting ends, automatic counting status notification ends.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The counting button 171 is operated at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed while it is still ON (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 coins are counted. When a further 1.5 seconds have passed while it is still ON (a cumulative total of 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting continues even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the first counting timing arrives after 2.0 seconds has passed, a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. Note that the counting sound may also be output after 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at a predetermined time interval. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative counting amount is increasing. The first counting sound output first and the second counting sound output next are output continuously, the second counting sound and the third counting sound output next are also output continuously, and the third counting sound and the fourth counting sound output next are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, tone, etc. may be changed. That is, the counting sound may change in stages. For example, the n+1th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm or a higher pitch than the nth counting sound. In addition, the volume may not increase at a predetermined time interval, and only the tone may change at a predetermined time interval. For example, the first counting sound may be a sound consisting of only instrument sound A, the second counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds consisting of instrument sound A plus instrument sound B, and the third counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds consisting of instrument sound A, instrument sound B, and instrument sound C. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, it may cause discomfort to the player. For example, it takes nearly 50 seconds to count 5,000 coins won through playing in one go. If the counting sound continues to be output during this time, it may be unpleasant to the ear and may also be annoyed by the player next to you. To address these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be set to decrease as time passes, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined time and then become silent (volume 0). Note that the volume of the counting sound may be set to decrease as time passes, and the counting sound may be output for a predetermined time and then become a constant sound (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of slot machines that are equipped with a function that allows players to customize the machine in various ways, players may be able to select the type of counting sound, its volume, and the way in which it changes (for example, whether the volume increases or decreases). This can also increase the interest when counting.

In addition to sound, a lamp may be illuminated or an image may be output, and the lamp's illumination or image may be changed in stages.

Figure 73 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power interruption occurs before the 0.5 second threshold for determining a long press operation has elapsed after the count button 171 has been operated.

In the example shown in FIG. 73(a), the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and a power outage occurs before the counting long press flag described with reference to FIG. 40 (or FIG. 58, FIG. 59) is set to ON, and the counting button 171 remains in an operated state until power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, power may be restored before the player releases his/her hand from the counting button 171. Alternatively, some players may not release their hands from the counting button 171 even after realizing that power has been cut off. However, this is merely a consideration of the case where the counting button 171 remains in operation from the time the power outage occurs until power is restored, and it is not possible to know whether the counting button 171 remains in operation until power is restored. If power is restored while the counting button 171 remains in operation, an ON signal is detected after power is restored without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If an ON signal is detected without detecting an up edge after power is restored, the medal count control unit 350 determines that the count button 171 has continued to be operated, and again determines whether the count button 171 remains operated until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since power was restored. If the count button 171 remains operated, the count long press flag is set to ON, and if the count button 171 continues to be operated, 50 medals are counted at the counting timing.

If a long press is performed after the power is restored, a long press notification may be performed. If the long press is continued at the time when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, the long press notification starts from this point. This means that if you release your hand from the counting button 171 before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the button will not be pressed for a long time, and the count will start after 0.5 seconds have elapsed and before the first counting timing arrives. If the button 171 is released, no sheets will be counted, so if the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed, the button 171 must be kept pressed for a long time. Pressing notification starts.

Note that if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet will be counted, but this may be due to an erroneous operation. For this reason, if the operation of the counting button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be determined that the counting button 171 has been erroneously operated and no sheets are counted.

Note that FIG. 73(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the counting button 171 is determined by detecting only the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171.

According to the example shown in FIG. 73(b), since the counting button 171 has been operated during the power outage, the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is continued to be operated, a long-press determination is not made and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 73(a), the long press is determined based on whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, so even if an up edge is not detected, Long press determination is executed.

Figure 74 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the example shown in Figure 73.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 74(a), power is interrupted when X seconds, which is shorter than the 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, and then power is restored.

After power is restored, if an ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, the X seconds that had elapsed before the power outage are subtracted from the 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for the long press operation, and if the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), it is determined that the counting button 171 has remained in an operated state for 0.5 seconds, and the counting long press flag is set to ON.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 74(b), the power is cut off when X seconds have elapsed from the start of operation of the count button 171, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, and then Power will be restored.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 74(b), a standby process is provided for a certain period (2 seconds in this example) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after power is turned on, the process waits until it is an appropriate timing for performing the counting process before performing the process related to the counting button 171. After the standby time has elapsed, the process related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 74(a). That is, if an ON signal is detected without detecting a rising edge of a signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, the X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure are subtracted from 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for the long press operation, and if the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the standby time has elapsed, it is determined that the counting button 171 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, and the counting long press flag is set to ON.

Figure 75 is a timing chart showing another variation of the example shown in Figure 73.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 75(a), after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed, and then the power is restored. .

After power is restored (powered on), if an on signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, the medal count control unit 350 determines that the count button 171 has been operated, and starts a timer dedicated to power-on. This timer measures a time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, the count long press timer, which is set to an initial value of 500 ms in step S4206 in FIG. 40, is set to an initial value of 2000 ms dedicated to power-on. In this way, for a long press operation immediately after powering on, the count long press flag is set to on if a long operation is performed, and if the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is still being operated, 50 medals will be counted.

In the fourth modified example shown in FIG. 75(b), after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, a power interruption occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed, and then power is restored. In this example, the counting button 171 is released during the power interruption, and the operation ends. Therefore, when the power is restored (power is turned on), the ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is not detected. In this fourth modified example, a timer dedicated to power-on is started in conjunction with power-on. This timer times a time longer (e.g., 3 seconds) than the normal long press operation judgment time (0.5 seconds). In addition, the timer setting value dedicated to power-on in this example is longer than the timer setting value dedicated to power-on in the third modified example (e.g., 2 seconds). If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the timer dedicated to power-on is timing, and the operation of the counting button 171 is still continuing after 3 seconds has elapsed, the counting long press flag is set to ON. That is, while the timer is counting, at least one of the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171 and the on signal is detected, and if the on signal is still detected after three seconds have passed, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is still being operated, 50 coins will be counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display explained using FIG. 62(b), will be explained in detail again.

Figure 76 (a) shows an example of a change display (subtraction) on the gaming medal count display device 170.

As shown at the top of FIG. 76(a), the number "100" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170. When the change display starts, the game medal count display device 170 displays a number that is decremented by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals in the display display process shown in FIG. 54. FIG. 76(a) shows how "1" is decremented by "99" → "98" → "97" → "96" → "95" → "94".

When 50 sheets are counted by pressing and holding the count button 171, the time required for the change display to change by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals is approximately 4 ms x 50 = 200 ms. Since the counting timing has a 300 ms cycle, the display time for the subtraction change display is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, making it possible to display a change that subtracts 50 sheets.

Figure 76 (b) shows an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal count display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 shown at the top of Figure 76 (b). When the change display starts, this game medal count display device 170 displays numbers that are incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, the same as the change display when subtracting. Figure 76 (b) shows how "1" is added at a time, from "101" → "102" → "103" → "104" → "105" → "106".

When the loan button 707 is operated and 50 coins are loaned out, and 15 coins (the maximum number of coins allowed by the rules) are paid out as a result of playing, the time required for the change display to change (add or subtract) by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms will be about 4 ms x 65 = about 260 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time for the change display to add is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, and it is also possible to display a change display that adds 65 coins.

Figure 77 shows another example of change display in the game medal count display device 170. Since the player may not notice a change in the display content of the game medal count display device 170, this is an example of notifying the player that there has been a change in the display content.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(a). In this example, the change is displayed using all digits, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle, all segments of all 5 digits are lit (display "88888"), and all segments of all 5 digits are turned off. In this example, the display (display of "00000") is switched every 8 ms. Eventually, in this example, after 250 ms have passed, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. Since the change display is performed using all the digits, it can be confirmed whether or not a failure has occurred in all the digit segments of the game medal number display device 170 that causes the display to stop. If it is recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change is displayed.

Note that, although all digits are used in the change display here, it is also possible to use only some of the digits in order to reduce the processing load and data volume. For example, a one-digit display including the rightmost digit, a two-digit display, or a three-digit display may be used. If the rightmost digit is not included when not using all digits, it may give the impression that the rightmost digit segment is faulty, so it is better to include the rightmost digit to show that there is no fault.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(b). In this example as well, the number changes from "100" to "85". That is, it changes from a 3-digit number to a 2-digit number. Therefore, changes are displayed using three-digit segments. The changing display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, making it appear as if the segments are rotating around. According to this change display, it is possible to give the impression that the value changes starting from "100". In this example, when 250 ms has passed since the start of the change display, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

If you use two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments to show the change, it will give the impression that the change ends at "85."

A display that changes stepwise by a predetermined number (for example, 20) toward the target value may be performed while sandwiching the two types of change display described above using FIG. 77. Specifically, when changing from "100" to the final value of "60" (target value), "100" → change display → "80" → change display → display "60". Become. Further, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used as the game medal number display device 170, the emitted light color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

Figure 78 shows an example in which the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358 is displayed not only on the game medal count display device 170 but also on the performance image display device 157.

The medal count control unit 350 sends a command including information representing the "game medal count" (the number of game medals displayed as shown in FIG. 11) to the game control unit 302 as a medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 includes information representing the "game medal count" in the security command and sends the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the information representing the "game medal count" via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the performance image display unit 157 to display the "game medal count". In this example, the "game medal count" is always displayed in the bottom right of the display screen of the performance image display unit 157.

In this example, the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is displayed as is, according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at 100 ms intervals. . The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 78 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. Further, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the count button 171 is pressed and held to count 50 sheets. The medal number control unit 350 starts executing the display display process shown in FIG. 54, and the game medal number display device 170 starts displaying a change that subtracts "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In addition, in FIG. 78, the display during the change display is shown in such a manner that all seven segments appear to be lit and some segments appear to be blinking slightly due to afterimages. In the game medal number display device 170, a change display that subtracts "1" is performed in about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 coins are counted, a security command including information indicating that the "game medal count" is 50 coins is received during the security command transmission period (100 ms). In the example shown in FIG. 78, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command about 20 ms after 50 coins are counted, and the display process is executed. The display process here is a frame replacement process that replaces an image displaying "100" with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the number "50" is displayed on the performance image display device 157 before the change display on the game medal count display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 78 described above, the sub-control unit (400, 500) side that receives the information on the "number of game medals" does not display the change, and the main control unit 300 side that outputs the information, Displays changes. By doing this, the numerical value "50" finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be understood from the display on the effect image display device 157, and "50" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display is complete at the point when the change display is completed.

Figure 79 shows a modified example of the example shown in Figure 78.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 79, the "game medal count" display on the effect image display device 157 also changes by subtracting "1" at a time. Moreover, the change display takes longer than the change display on the game medal count display device 170. Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 takes 280 ms. This 280 ms is longer than the time (approximately 4 ms x 65 = approximately 260 ms) required for the game medal count display device 170 to display an incremental change when 50 medals are lent by operating the lending button 707 and 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals that can be paid out) are paid out as a result of playing, and is less than 300 ms, which is the cycle of the counting timing.

The player usually looks at the performance image display device 157 in many cases, and rarely looks at the game medal number display device 170. As mentioned above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals", and that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 should be increased. To do this, it is necessary for players to pay attention to the "number of game medals." The reason why the ``number of game medals'' is also displayed on the performance image display device 157 is to make the players pay as much attention to the ``number of game medals'' as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. It becomes difficult. Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the performance image display device 157 is made to take longer than the display on the number of game medal display device 170, the player can It can be expected that the player will also pay attention to the speedy game medal number display device 170. If the player looks at the game medal number display device 170, no performance display is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, and the player can clearly recognize the "number of game medals." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is being accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase.

The change display on the performance image display device 157 not only displays changing text, but also displays an animation indicating that a change is occurring, which draws attention to the "game medal count," and it is expected that the frequency of operation of the count button 171 will also increase. By displaying the change display on the performance image display device 157 in a different manner from the change display on the game medal count display device 170, it is possible to display the change display in a manner appropriate to the period of the change display. The change display on the performance image display device 157 may also be displayed in the same manner as the change display on the game medal count display device 170. This makes it easy to recognize that a change display is occurring.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 78.

In this alternative example shown in FIG. 80, the game medal count display device 170 does not display any changes, but only displays the "game medal count" on the performance image display device 157. That is, in this alternative example, the display device display process shown in FIG. 54 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal count display device 170. On the other hand, even if the performance image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display according to the information representing the "game medal count" contained in the security command, but instead displays a change by subtracting "1" at a time.

In this example, just like the modified example shown in FIG. 79, it takes longer for the "game medal count" to be displayed on the performance image display device 157 than on the game medal count display device 170, so it is expected that the player will also pay attention to the game medal count display device 170, which displays quickly. By looking at the game medal count display device 170, the player will be able to clearly recognize the "game medal count." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is accumulating, and it is expected that the frequency of operating the count button 171 will increase. In addition, in the medal count control unit 350, the amount of data for displaying changes is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

FIG. 81(a) is a timing chart when a payout exceeds the payout threshold.

Figure 81 (a) shows the value of the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358. Below that, the number of medals to be paid out that will be added to the "game medal count" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medal count." In other words, the maximum number of medals that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of medals that can be stored.

In a state where the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16,373 medals, a further payout of 15 medals corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals (corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals allowed under the rules) occurs. The payout number of 15 coins is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. When the number of payout medals of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum stored number of medals and exceeds the payout threshold in step S4B03 of FIG. 50. Therefore, the payout response command includes "abnormality" and is transmitted from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302. If the payout response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 transmits a command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout). (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 22). Based on this command, the sub-control unit (400, 500) issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 81(a), an upper limit exceeded error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, indicating that the payout threshold has been exceeded and the count is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. A text display prompting the user to operate the button 171 is displayed. That is, the upper limit exceedance error notification is executed even during the game.

Note that an error sound may be output from the speaker 272 or a lamp may be lit as an upper limit exceedance error notification.

Figure 81 (b) shows another example of an upper limit exceeded error notification.

The upper limit exceeding error notification may be displayed by blinking on the effect image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 81(b), the text display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the gaming background display. Because the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed during play and so as to overlap with the gaming background display, it becomes difficult to see the gaming background display. Therefore, to avoid causing any disadvantage to the player, a blinking display is used to ensure a period during which the gaming background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives a payout response command including "normal" from the medal count control unit 350, it sends a payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 22). When the sub-control unit (400, 500) receives a payout command while an upper limit exceeding error notification is being executed, it ends the execution of the upper limit exceeding error notification. Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceeding error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be ended early even if the counting process takes time.

In addition, information representing the "game medal count" stored in the RAM 358 is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in the form of a security command. If the information representing the "game medal count" sent is the number of medals at the payout threshold (16,383 medals), the sub-control unit (400, 500) may issue an upper limit reaching error notification. For example, the performance image display device 157 may display a text display saying "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the information representing the "game medal count" sent is a number less than the payout threshold (16,383 medals). Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification can be terminated early even if the counting process takes time.

In addition, other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added include when settlement is made and when a medal is loaned from the loaning machine 700. In this embodiment, the settlement is not judged to have reached the upper limit, but it may be judged to have reached the upper limit in the same way as when a medal is paid out. For example, the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of medals stored, and even if the settlement threshold is exceeded by settlement, the settlement response command includes "abnormality" and is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. And even if the settlement response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 sends an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in exceeding the upper limit of the number of game medals displayed, and the sub-control units (400, 500) issue an error notification of the upper limit exceeded. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a number smaller than the maximum number of stored medals (for example, 15,000 medals), and if the "game medal count" exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit lending error occurs, the lending is not accepted (if the judgment in step S3712 in FIG. 36 is No), and the "game medal count" is not added. A notice of the upper limit lending error is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, by transmitting the occurrence of the upper limit lending error from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302, and then from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, it becomes possible to notify the slot machine 100 side, such as the performance image display device 157, speaker 272, or lamp.

FIG. 82(a) is a timing chart when the second payout threshold is exceeded and a payout is attempted.

In FIG. 82(a) as well, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and below that the number of payout medals to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The game control unit 302 receives a command including the game medal count display number (game medal count) as a medal count control state command from the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 is set with a payout second threshold (for example, 15,000 medals) that is less than the maximum memory number of 16,383 medals (payout threshold) of the RAM 358. If the game medal count display number sent as a command is equal to or greater than this payout second threshold, the game control unit 302 transmits an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in which the game medal display number is close to the upper limit. The sub-control unit (400, 500) performs a notification of the close to upper limit based on this error occurrence command. In the example shown in FIG. 82(a), a character display urging the operation of the count button 171 is displayed as a notification of the close to upper limit on the performance image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, so as to overlap with the game background display. That is, even in this example, a notification of the close to upper limit is executed during the game. FIG. 81(a) above shows the performance image display device 157 switching from displaying the upper limit approaching notification to displaying an upper limit exceeded error notification.

As the notification that the upper limit is approaching, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on. Although the notification that the upper limit is approaching continues from when the notification that the upper limit is approaching is started until the notification that the upper limit is exceeded is started, the notification that the upper limit is approaching may be implemented only for a part of a game, taking into consideration the game up to the upper limit of the number of game medals. For example, the notification may be implemented within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the notification that the upper limit is exceeded is implemented during a game. For example, if it is known that the bonus period for AT play or the like is short even after the notification that the upper limit is approaching is started, it is possible to easily prioritize the remaining AT play. Furthermore, when the notification is switched from the notification that the upper limit is approaching to the notification that the upper limit is exceeded, the player can easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

Figure 82 (b) shows another example of an upper limit approach notification.

Even when the upper limit is near, a blinking display may be performed on the effect image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 82(b), the character display of the upper limit nearing notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The near upper limit notification is also displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

In addition, when the game control unit 302 receives a command including the display number of game medals that is less than the second threshold for payout from the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit 302 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to notify the first sub-control unit 400 that the number of game medals to be displayed is about to error. Sends an error clearing command indicating that the error has been cleared. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), the execution of the near-upper limit notification is terminated based on this error cancellation command.

Further, a second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, if the information indicating the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 500) side may perform the above-mentioned upper limit approaching notification. This near-limit notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control unit 350. In this case, the medal count control unit 350 determines whether the "game medal count" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, and if it is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, it transmits a notification command to the game control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. This also allows the sub-control unit (400, 500) to execute the upper limit approach notification. Then, when it falls below the second payout threshold, it transmits a notification end command via the medal count control unit 350 → game control unit 302 → sub-control unit (400, 500) route. Note that the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit approach notification should be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeding error notification. If the blinking cycle is short when the notification switches from the approaching upper limit to the upper limit exceeded error notification, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. Note that if the notification about the approaching upper limit is a blinking display, the upper limit exceeded error notification can be displayed constantly. This makes it easy to recognize the urgency of the notification.

FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 83(a) displays a display indicating that the upper limit is near, overlapping the game background display. Note that the upper limit approaching notification display may be displayed constantly, but it is a blinking display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit nearing notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control section 302 transmits an error occurrence command indicating that a door opening error has occurred to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit (400, 500) side performs error notification based on this error occurrence command. When the front door 102 is open, there is an increased possibility of fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is more urgent than the notification prompting counting. Note that even when the front door 102 is open, the operation of the counting button 171 is accepted. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 83(a) displays an error notification of a door opening error overlapping the game background display. The error notification display for the door open error (hereinafter referred to as the door open error display) is always displayed as the words "Door is open." This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the near-limit notification display, but it may also be displayed on a layer before the near-limit notification display so that it overlaps with the near-limit notification display. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on a layer deeper than the blinking upper limit notification, and the blinking upper limit nearing notification overlaps with the always displayed door open error display. You can do it like this.

Figure 83(b) shows that the text display of the upper limit approaching warning is displayed every second in addition to the door open error display, which is always displayed. The right side of Figure 83(b) shows how the text display of the upper limit approaching warning disappears by blinking, leaving the door open error display, which is always displayed. In the state shown on the right, the door open error display, which is of high urgency, is easy to see. Also, a sound such as "The door is open" is output from speaker 272 as an error notification of the door open error, but the warning sound of the upper limit approaching warning is not output.

Although the error is not as urgent as the door open error, there are errors such as ``Please stop the spinning reel'' and ``A communication error has occurred, which may be caused by a disconnected wire, a broken wire, or a power outage in the rental machine 700.'' ” may be displayed to request improvements, and in addition to these displays, notifications urging counting may also be provided.

FIG. 84(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if no bet operation is performed within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) from when all reels 110-112 have stopped if no payout has been made, or from when the payout has been completed if a payout has been made, the slot machine 100 will transition to a demonstration state (demonstration in progress). The slot machine will also transition to demonstration in progress if the settlement button 134 is operated.

In the example shown in FIG. 84(a), during a game (during a bet, while the reels are rotating 110 to 112, or during a payout), the character display indicating that the upper limit is near is started, and the transition is made to the demo without the counting button 171 being operated. . The effect image display device 157 displays a game background display during the game, but switches to the demo display when the demo is in progress. The demo display is a display that introduces the story and characters. Even in the case of transitioning to the demonstration, the text display of the upper limit nearing notification continues to be displayed as long as the "number of game medals" does not become less than the second threshold for payout. If the transition is made during the demonstration, there is a high possibility that the players will leave their seats. By prompting the player to operate the count button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the slot machine 100 by taking only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the game medals in the slot machine 100. Note that the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be continued to ensure visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be constantly displayed to ensure visibility of the near upper limit notification.

Figure 84 (b) shows an example of a notification after the count button 171 is operated during a demo.

A demonstration image is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(b). The notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demo display. Here, since we want the user to operate the counting button 171 with priority, the notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size. Further, below that, a warning message is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away, such as ``Be careful not to forget or steal your card.'' Further, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the performance image display device 157, and "15300", which exceeds the second threshold for payout, is displayed. Note that "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 84(a). good.

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a number less than the second threshold for payout. Then, the notification prompting counting disappears (is not displayed), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. Note that the "number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the performance image display device 157 has decreased to "14,950".

FIG. 85(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number.

In FIG. 85(a), the value of the "game medal count" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. This X medals corresponds to a certain prescribed number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold. In the performance image display device 157, a notification is displayed to encourage counting because the "game medal count" has exceeded the prescribed number. When this notification is displayed, the operation of the count button 171 is started, and the "game medal count" immediately falls below the prescribed number. Here, the long press operation of the count button 171 is continued. In this example, the notification to encourage counting continues even if the "game medal count" falls below the prescribed number. In other words, the notification to encourage counting continues until the "game medal count" becomes less than the prescribed number by a further prescribed number (for example, 100, which is 50 times 2 times). The arrow of the notification period in the figure indicates the period during which a notification to encourage counting, such as "Please operate the count button," is being given.

If the notification were to start when a set number is reached and immediately end when the set number falls below that, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted, so in this example, the notification continues until the number falls below the set number at which the notification starts. This makes it possible to reduce the number of repetitions of notifications and counting operations. Note that the notification encouraging counting may be made for a fixed period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals played. This makes it possible to encourage the player to count a larger number.

Note that the prescribed number may be a threshold for payment, a threshold for lending, or another threshold.

In addition, if the "number of game medals" falls below a specified number due to a betting operation, the number of medals will only decrease by a maximum of three, but the notification encouraging the player to count may continue regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" that decreases by the above-mentioned specified number.

Figure 85 (b) shows an example of a notification that prompts the player to count when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over multiple games.

When the "game medal count" in a certain game exceeds the second payout threshold (15,000 in this example), a notification is started to prompt the player to count. The notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification is started, the player does not operate the count button 171 and continues playing. As a result, the game continues without the "game medal count" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "game medal count" exceeds the second payout threshold, a notification is made once every several games (four games in this example). Therefore, no notification is made for three games after the notification is made. During the three games during which no notification is made, the effect display such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 becomes easier to see, which may increase the interest in the game. Note that when the "game medal count" falls below the second payout threshold, the notification is no longer made to prompt the player to count. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during the three games during which no notification prompting counting has been made, no notification prompting counting will be made until the number of game medals next exceeds the second payout threshold. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during a game during which a notification prompting counting has been made, the notification prompting counting that had been made up until that point will disappear (become hidden).

Next, notification regarding counting will be further explained.

Figure 86 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that prompts the player to count each time the "game medal count" increases by a predetermined number. Each diagram ((a) to (c)) in Figure 86 shows the value of the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(a), a notification is issued every time the "game medal count" increases by 1000 medals, encouraging the player to count. First, when the "game medal count" exceeds 1000 medals, a display indicating that the number of medals has exceeded 1000 medals and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. These displays are displayed for a predetermined time or until the next change in the "game medal count" (same below). Thus, they are displayed even during gameplay. Next, when the "game medal count" exceeds 2000 medals, a display indicating that the number of medals has exceeded 2000 medals and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Furthermore, when the "game medal count" exceeds 3000 medals, a display indicating that the number of medals has exceeded 3000 medals and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. These notifications are then repeated until the number of medals exceeds 14000 medals. Then, when the "game medal number" reaches 15,000, which is the second payout threshold, the display prompting the player to count will continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 82(a) unless the "game medal number" falls below 15,000. When the number of game medals reaches 15,000, the display prompting the player to count may continue to be displayed together with the text display "15,000 or more medals have been reached." When the "game medal number" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold and equal to or less than the payout threshold, the actual value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (for example, "15,015 medals have been reached" may be displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the player can roughly grasp the number of game medals even without looking at the game medal number display device 170. In the unlikely event that a problem occurs with the game machine and the "game medal number" is lost, the player can easily grasp the extent of the lost number. The display prompting the player to count may be displayed according to the time that has elapsed since the start of a special game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a special game such as an AT game, a display prompting the player to count is displayed when 10 minutes have passed, when 20 minutes have passed, and when 30 minutes have passed. The display can be displayed periodically regardless of the number of medals played.

Figure 86 (b) shows an example where the count button 171 is operated in a situation advantageous to the player.

Here, the AT state is defined as a state advantageous to the player. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" is likely to increase through payouts. During play in this AT state, a display (AT game display) suggesting or indicating that the current state is the AT state is displayed on the effect image display device 157. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 during the AT state, as shown on the effect image display device 157 on the left side of Figure 86 (b), a display is displayed indicating that the number has exceeded 1000 medals and encouraging the player to count them. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed and held down for a long time, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value (in this example, "100").

The state advantageous to the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the "number of game medals" by paying out. Therefore, the state is not limited to the AT state, but may be a state in which a bonus (RB, BB) is in operation or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to continue to increase, and it can be said that the entire number of game medals can be counted (outputted to the lending machine 700). However, if all the game medals are counted, the number of coins to be inserted in the next game (for example, 3 coins) will also be counted, and the next game will not be possible unless they are lent out from the lending machine 700. It ends up. Further, even if the situation is advantageous, there may be cases where the consumption of the "number of game medals" happens to be greater than the payout. Therefore, even if the situation is advantageous, a notification is made to the effect that it is advisable to keep a small number of game medals. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 86(b) is in a state where the “number of game medals” has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and the effect image display device 157 has a message “Stop counting. Please proceed with the game.'' A notification (counting completion guidance notification) is made to the effect that it is advisable to leave a small number of game medals. That is, before the counting of all the game medals is finished, the counting completion guide notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting completion guidance notification shown here, a notification such as ``It is better to leave the gaming value aside'' or ``If you count all the games, you will not be able to play the game'' may be used. In other words, before the counting of all the game medals is completed, a drawback in the case where all the game medals are counted may be notified.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 86(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the player releases the count button 171. In this example, the player sees the notification that it is a good idea to leave a small number of "game medals", so he releases the count button 171 and counting ends when 50 "game medals" are left.

FIG. 86(c) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting button 171 is operated in a situation disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the disadvantageous situation for the player refers to a situation in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease if the game is played repeatedly without being lent out. An example is the normal state. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or represents the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(c), the counting button 171 is pressed and held continuously when the "game medal count" is 1000, causing the "game medal count" to decrease beyond a certain value (in this example, "100"). If the situation is unfavorable to the player, it is unlikely that the player will continue playing after counting is completed, so no notification is given to the player that it is a good idea to leave some "game medal count" remaining. In this example, the counting button 171 is pressed and held continuously until the "game medal count" reaches 0. When the "game medal count" reaches 0, the text display 157 displays the message "Please stop counting."

Figure 87(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in Figure 86(b). The following explanation focuses on the differences from the example shown in Figure 86(b).

In the example shown in FIG. 87(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-press operation of the counting button 171 is continued, counting is temporarily ended. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 87(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "Counting has ended once." ing. To restart counting once it has been forcibly ended, a new operation of the counting button 171 is required.

Figure 87 (b) shows an example in which counting that was forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 87(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 87(a), where the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the "game medal number" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), so the counting is forcibly terminated. In this example, the player has a reason to stop playing even in an advantageous state, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the counting button 171 again. In this modified example, when the "game medal number" falls below the predetermined value, the counting of "50" by the long press of the counting button 171 is not effective, and even if a long press is performed, only "1" is counted. That is, the "game medal number" decreases by "1" each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives. This is for the same reason as mentioned above, if all of the game medals were counted, the number of medals inserted for the next game (for example, three medals) would also be counted, and the next game would not be possible unless medals were loaned out from the loaning machine 700. Therefore, to prevent the number of game medals from reaching 0, the number is only counted in increments of "1".

When the number of game medals reaches 0, the text "Counting has ended" will be displayed on the performance image display device 157.

Note that if the player presses and holds the counting button 171 again, counting in increments of "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 87(c) is an example of the modified example explained using FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). In the modified example as well, if the player is in a disadvantageous situation, it is effective to press and hold the count button 171 until the "number of game medals" reaches 0, as in the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

However, even if the player is in an unfavorable state (for example, the normal state), in order to motivate the player to continue playing, the same processing as when the player is in an advantageous state (the processing shown in Figures 87(a) and 87(b) or the processing shown in Figure 86(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off.

The VL signal is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 in the ON state. If this VL signal is OFF, it is suspected that the lending machine 700 is not powered on, and there is a risk that lending or counting will not be possible. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 using a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 11 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. 16 is No, and the process continues until the VL signal is turned on. I can't proceed. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation, and even if the bet buttons 130, 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation. That is, some of the plurality of types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, some operations are operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal turns off after the first half of the game starts (the reels start rotating), the second half of the operation (operations of stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) will not be valid. be. Therefore, although the game is limited, it is possible to proceed with the game. If the operation becomes invalid while timing the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the operation becomes valid and it is necessary to judge the timing from scratch, which may give an annoying impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though it is not possible to count, if the game progress operation up to determining the validity of the internal winning by lottery is enabled, for example, if a result advantageous to the player is obtained and the game suddenly becomes a big success. If the presentation is started, there is a risk that the player's desire to continue playing the game may increase. As a result, there was a possibility that there would be a delay in taking countermeasures when the VL signal was turned off, but the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be disabled. It is possible to promptly notify the player that the VL signal has been turned off. Note that even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is performed. Furthermore, if it is treated as an error, an error clearing operation is required, but since the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the rental machine 700 side is suspected, so an error clearing operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). I don't even ask for it. Note that, as in the example below, a configuration may be adopted in which error notification is performed while the VL signal is off.

Figure 88(a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. Also shown below that is the value of the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358. Also shown below that is the state of the VL signal.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the VL signal is on, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. In addition, no error notification, which will be described later, is performed.

When the VL signal is in the OFF state, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In addition, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157. The performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 88(a) displays text such as "Communication with the rental machine not established." Note that the error notification may also be a notification that the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the rental machine has not been established" may be displayed.

Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal turns off, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In the modified example described below, the response differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are performed in a state where the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold (in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold for payout). As shown in FIG. 88(a), if the VL signal is turned off (for example, in the state of 980 sheets), it is treated as an invalid operation. The fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the player could end the game at any time. Therefore, the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the clerk should promptly Promote repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

Figure 88 (b) shows a first modified example in which the "number of game medals" is 15,550 medals, which is greater than or equal to the second payout threshold of 15,000.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the various game progression operations are invalidated. In other words, the insertion operation for the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130, 132) is invalidated, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 88(b), if the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game cannot be played. Until this happens, we do not intentionally stop the progress of the game so that players can enjoy it. Furthermore, the fact that the game continues even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout means that the player is often in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and in this state, the player cannot continue playing the game. Stopping the game is highly likely to reduce the interest in the game, which is undesirable, so the player does not intentionally stop the progress of the game.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 88(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but even in this modification, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157. is displayed.

Figure 89 shows a second variant in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is below a certain threshold.

The state shown in Figure 89 (a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14,000, which is less than a certain threshold (15,000, which is the second payout threshold in this example). In the second modified example, even if the VL signal turns off in this state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are both valid. However, even in the second modified example, when the VL signal turns off, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The state shown in Figure 89 (b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15,550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold). In the second modified example, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progression operations are invalidated. In other words, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of a game are invalidated. In addition, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The second modified example shown in FIG. 89 is the opposite of the first modified example, but a small number of "game medals" may mean that the game has just started, and the aim is not to hinder the progress of the game that has just started. In addition, in the slot machine 100, even if any trouble occurs, it is not impossible that the "game medals" will disappear, so if the "game medals" disappear when the "game medals" are large, the disadvantage will be large. Therefore, when the "game medals" are equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold), the progress of the game is stopped, and the store clerk is encouraged to repair it as soon as possible. In addition, a large number of "game medals" can be interpreted as a state in which the player may perform a counting operation at any time, so the aim is to make the player realize early that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and to encourage the store clerk to repair it as soon as possible.

From what has been explained above, the way to respond when the VL signal is turned off changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the situation is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Note that an advantageous state for the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the number of game medals by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and an unfavorable state. is a state (for example, a normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed as shown in FIG. 88(a). At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold in a situation that is advantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 88(b). All operations in the operation are treated as valid operations.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. All operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed, as shown in FIG. 89(b). The operations of at least some of them may be disabled.

If the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, in order to make the player aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and to encourage the store staff to repair the situation at an early stage, at least one of the multiple types of game progress operations can be performed. operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, there is a possibility that the player has just entered an advantageous state. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, there is a possibility that counting is not necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to hinder the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the ``number of game medals'' is less than a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the player is made to notice early and the store staff In order to encourage early recovery, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled when the VL signal is turned off.

FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error cancellation operation is requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 90(a), it is treated as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and a request is made to the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) to perform an error cancellation operation. As explained above, there is a high possibility that the VL signal is turned off because the lending machine 700 is not powered on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, there is a high possibility that an error will occur again. However, by indicating an error, a clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700.

The example shown in Figure 90(b) is an example in which the game can continue until the count button 171 is operated, even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. The fact that the VL signal is turned off means that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the rental machine 700 side can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If an error notification is made on the rental machine 700 side immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called without the need for the notification on the slot machine 100 side immediately. Furthermore, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, a counting notification may not be sent to the lending machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing this, the slot machine 100 can make notifications with the minimum number of opportunities, and by suppressing excessive notifications, the player can play the game comfortably.

Note that after the operation of the counting button 171 is detected, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal is turned back on.

[Configuration regarding the difference between dispensing and counting processing]
When the increase in the number of game medals per unit of play in a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a bonus state, is greater than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit of play due to the counting process, it becomes difficult to end the counting process in the advantageous state to the player. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 medals, and it is possible to count less than 10 medals in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, if the counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the number of game medals will continue to increase during the AT game. Therefore, if a performance associated with the counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the execution period of this performance will be long, and it will be difficult to perform a performance with an end scene in anticipation of the end of the counting, for example. In addition, when a counting performance (FIG. 63, etc.) is performed in relation to the counting process, this counting performance will interfere with other performances, and the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, by designing the increase in the number of game medals per unit of play in an advantageous game state to be smaller than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit of play due to the counting process, such problems can be made less likely to occur. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 medals, and if it is possible to count more than 10 medals in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, if the counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the number of game medals will continue to decrease during the AT game. For example, if it is possible to count 50 medals every 300 ms when the counting button 171 is pressed continuously, a decrease of about 700 medals can be expected in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, if a performance associated with counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the end of the execution period of this performance can be estimated. In addition, for example, a setting suggestion performance may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased) according to the execution time of the counting process.

The counting performance is not limited to a configuration in which the counting performance ends in accordance with the counting process, but may end even while the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 increases as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting performance is executed uniformly in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, there is a risk of problems such as a decrease in interest in the game due to the counting performance being executed for a long time, or the counting performance interfering with other performances. Such problems may be prevented by ending the counting performance even while the counting process is continuing. Examples of such a configuration include a configuration in which the counting performance ends depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting performance ends when the content defined as the counting performance is executed. If the counting process ends before the end condition of the counting performance is satisfied, the counting performance may end or may continue.

Furthermore, the content of the counting effect may change depending on the amount of game medals that have been counted. In this case, the performance content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the performance content may be set based on the cumulative number of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. You can also do this. Further, for example, when the amount of game medals that have been counted exceeds a predetermined value, a setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased). After the player acquires a large number of game medals, the player starts counting and can select a game move. In addition, regarding such a counting performance according to the amount of game medals, if the counting process and counting performance are terminated midway due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk of it getting lost. Therefore, even after a counting performance ends midway, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, one second), It is also possible to restart the lost counting performance from the middle. In addition, the counting effect continues to be executed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is not started while this counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect that is currently being executed may be continued as is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the above-mentioned predetermined time may be the same as, for example, the determination time of long press of the count button 171.

Further, for example, when operating the counting button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If a performance that requests an operation on such an operating means is performed while a counting performance is being performed, there is a risk that an erroneous operation may be induced. For this reason, while the counting performance is being performed, the performance that requires operation of some kind of operating means may not be performed (or the probability of execution may be reduced). Furthermore, effects that become extremely difficult to recognize when executed simultaneously with the counting effects may be similarly restricted. In other words, a configuration may be provided in which a performance is limited during execution of the counting performance. Note that the performance does not have to require operation of the operating means; for example, performances that involve freezes that prevent the game from progressing, or performances that take a long time to execute and whose results are not known until the end should be avoided. You can.

For example, if the counting process is started while the side lamp is on, which is an advantageous effect, the side lamp effect may change to a counting effect, and the advantageous effect may be replaced with a counting effect. Also, if a certain effect is started while a counting effect is being executed, the counting effect may be replaced with the effect that will be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes depending on the degree of game progress while the counting process is being executed, such as the character changing (for example, growing) when the game progresses while the counting process is being executed. You can also do this.

In addition, when the number of game medals reaches 0 and the counting process and counting effect are finished, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if a new number of game medals is acquired and the counting process starts, it will be possible to The counting performance that has ended may be restarted from where it left off.

In addition, at least some of the game progress operations may be restricted while the counting process is being performed, such as preventing the start operation of the next game while the counting process is being performed.

[Configuration for dispensing and settling operations during counting processing]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing and holding the counting button 171, the number of game medals can be transferred to the lending machine 700 in increments of 50. FIG. 91(a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the counting button 171 is pressed and held from a state in which there are 120 game medals. Specifically, the flow is shown in which 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and further all of the remaining 20 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, until the number of game medals becomes 0.

In the counting process, the current medal count is temporarily set as the medal count for counting (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the counting process is performed based on this medal count for counting (FIG. 34). If the medal count increases (by disbursement or settlement) after the medal count for counting is set, the medal count for counting is reflected in the medal count for counting. FIG. 91(b) shows the change in medal count when 8 medals are disbursed while 70 medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a). In this example, 50 medals out of the remaining 70 medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 medals, and the amount of the 8 medals disbursed is added to the remaining medal count of 28 medals. After that, all of the remaining medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the medal count becomes 0.

In the embodiment described above, as in the example of FIG. 91(b), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is continuing is reflected by this continuing counting process, and the number of game medals at the time the counting process started (120 medals in FIG. 91(b)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 medals in FIG. 91(b)) do not match, which may result in a workload when the counting process data is checked later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is continuing may not be reflected immediately, but may be reflected after the number of game medals becomes 0 or the counting process that was continuing is terminated by releasing the count button 171 before the number of game medals becomes 0. For example, if the count button 171 is continuously pressed, the 120 medals stored when the count button 171 was pressed are counted, and then the 8 medals that were added during the press of the count button 171 are counted. For example, if the count button 171 is released midway, 60 medals out of the 120 medals stored when the count button 171 was pressed are counted, and then the 68 medals stored when the count button 171 was pressed again are counted. After the counting process is restarted, the number of medals at the time the counting process is started is 68 medals, so the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50 medals → 18 medals. In FIG. 91(c), 8 medals are paid out while the number of medals of 70 medals is transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a), but this increase is not reflected until the number of medals becomes 0 (the same flow as FIG. 91(a)), and this increase is reflected after the number of medals becomes 0, and the counting process continues until the number of medals becomes 0. With this configuration, it is possible to match the number of game medals at the start of the counting process (120 medals in FIG. 91(c)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals reaches 0 (120 medals in FIG. 91(c)).

In addition, in FIG. 91(e), while the number of 70 game medals is being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 coins that were stored when the game started, the 8 coins that were paid out were counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

If the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is continuing, the total value of all these may be reflected later, or, while the counting process is continuing, each time the number of game medals reaches 0, it may be reflected one by one.

Note that the display on the game medal number display device 170 when the above configuration is adopted may also be a display that matches the change in the number of game medals. Further, an increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the display of a decrease in the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in value due to the counting process in this case, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is a deviation by the amount of increase). FIG. 91(d) shows a flow when a configuration is adopted in which an increase in the number of game medals (payout and settlement operations) is immediately reflected on the display, compared to the flow in FIG. 91(c). There is. In this configuration, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display will be in a state where there is a deviation by the above-mentioned increase, but they will be in a state where they match at the end of the counting process. Even if you release the counting button 171 to end the counting process before the number of game medals reaches 0, the increase will be reflected in the number of game medals at that point, so the value of the actual number of game medals will differ. The values of the number of game medals on the display match.

Note that the timing to reflect the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 anew, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700. Alternatively, the timing may be the timing when the number of game medals reaches 0 while the counting process continues, and in this case, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700 without operating the counting button 171 again. It may also be possible to move it (the counting process continues, FIG. 91(e)).

Incidentally, increases in the number of game medals can be made by payouts or settlement operations, and either one of these may be the subject of the configuration described in FIG. 91(c), or both may be the subject.

[About setting the bet reduction by bet button operation]
In the embodiment described above, if the player wishes to change the number of game medals from three bets to one, the player can operate the settlement button 134 to return the bet of three medals to the "number of game medals" and then operate the bet button 130 for one bet again to change the current bet to one medal. In this case, the operation of the settlement button 134 and the operation of the bet button 130 are required, but the configuration may be such that these operations can be performed by one operation of the bet button 130. As an example of such a configuration, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is at the maximum value, a settlement button process (FIG. 18) is executed and then a process for the bet button operation is executed. In addition, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is at the maximum value, a settlement command (FIG. 13) is sent with the change in the bet number from the maximum value to the minimum value (the difference of 2 in the above example) as the settlement number, and the value of the current bet number may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a part of the bet number is settled by the operation of the bet button 130, and a separate insertion process or insertion command is not required. These configurations correspond to examples of a configuration in which the current bet amount is set to the minimum value based on the operation of an operating means capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount when the current bet amount is at the maximum value.

When the above configuration is adopted, the current bet number can be changed from 0 to 1 to 2 to 3 to 1 to 2... by repeatedly operating the bet button 130, and the current bet number can be changed by simply operating the bet button 130.

Note that if there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and an input sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For this operation, the checkout sound and the input sound may be output continuously. However, since there is a risk of confusion for the player if two types of sounds are output for a single operation, the current number of bets will change from the maximum value to the minimum value when the bet button 130 is operated. , the input sound may be output without outputting the payment sound. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters etc. indicating that the settlement has been made are displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and when the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters indicating that payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that he or she has operated the settlement button 134 instead of the bet button 130.

[About the effects according to the number of medals played]
A configuration for executing different effects depending on the number of game medals will be described below with reference to Fig. 92. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed depending on the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal count control state command and security command). The following example is an example of an operation for executing different effects depending on the value of this game medal count. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the game medal count reaches a specified number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the specified number is reached.

First, FIG. 92(a1) shows the situation at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 92(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 92(a3) shows what happens when medals are acquired in the AT state, and FIG. 92(a4) shows what happens when the AT state ends. In addition, in the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the "possession" value in the upper left corner of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "...GET" section in the upper right corner of the screen. Displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 92(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the special performance is not performed and the normal performance (FIG. 92(a2)) is performed.

Next, Fig. 92 (b1) to (b3) show an example of a case where a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, the state where a normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not yet reached the predetermined number (Fig. 92 (b1)) changes to a state where medals are acquired and the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number (Fig. 92 (b2)), and then the state where a special effect is executed (Fig. 92 (b3)). In this special effect, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the background music are different from the normal effect. In other words, the effect changes when many game medals have been acquired, which can increase the interest of the game.

The different effects are not limited to the above-mentioned special effects, and various effects can be used. The different effects are not limited to configurations in which different effects are used, but may be, for example, a different effect inserted into a part of a base effect while it is being executed, resulting in a different effect overall. For example, the number of game medals played and the number of medals acquired may be displayed in different colors or sizes, such as changing the color of each digit to make it rainbow, or changing the color of each digit periodically. The state in which the effects are different is not limited to the AT state, and it is sufficient if the effects are different when the player is in a favorable state.

Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the performance is switched immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but it is sufficient that the performance executed differs depending on whether or not the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number. The presentation may be switched when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number and further satisfies some condition (for example, playing the number of games, winning a switching lottery), or whether the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number or not. It is also possible to have a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 92(c1), when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest display) is executed at the ending.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to one in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but may be one in which a different effect or display is more likely to be executed compared to when the number of game medals does not reach the predetermined number.

Also, for example, the above-mentioned special effect may be executed when the number of game medals reaches 3000, and a display suggesting a set value may be executed at the ending when the number of game medals reaches 2000. The number of game medals that act as a trigger for different types of effects and displays may be set separately.

In the above example, the number of game medals is used as the judgment target for whether or not to execute a different effect or display. However, the same effect may be achieved even if the number of medals held stored on the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or in the upper server is used as the judgment target, or the sum of the number of game medals and the number of medals held is used as the judgment target. The value used at this time is not limited to the total number of medals held, and a part of it (for example, 1000 of the 5000 medals held) may be used. When adopting such a configuration, information on the number of medals held may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that, when the credit balance is handled by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or the upper server, the value of this credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals may be used in a similar configuration to the above-mentioned configuration using the number of medals held. In this way, the information on the game value managed by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or in the upper server may be used as the judgment target for whether or not to execute a different effect or display.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of judgment targets are used and the results are combined, for example, a different presentation is executed when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of held medals is 5000 or more, that is, a different presentation is executed when the number of game medals and the number of held medals (or either one of them) satisfy certain conditions. Note that the above judgment targets may be configured not to display their values, but when the values to be judged are displayed as in the above example, the relationship between the judgment targets and the presentation becomes easier to grasp, which is expected to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the above example, a configuration has been described in which the number of game medals and the number of held medals are used as the determination target for whether or not to perform different effects or displays, but the number of acquired medals in the AT state may be used as the determination target. FIGS. 93(d1) to (d7) show an example in which a special performance is executed when the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). Of this flow, FIGS. 93(d2) to (d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000, similar to the case explained using FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3). However, in this example, the execution of the special performance is determined based on the number of acquired medals, so unlike FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3), no special performance is performed at this point. Thereafter, the state becomes such that the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (here, 3000) (FIG. 93(d5)), and thereafter the state enters a state where a special performance is executed (FIG. 93(d6)). In this example as well, the presentation changes as the number of acquired medals increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG. 92(c1) are displayed because the number of acquired medals has reached 2000.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was explained in which a different effect or display is executed when the number of game medals, the number of held medals, and the number of acquired medals reach a predetermined number. The configuration may be such that the number of medals is used, and the number of acquired medals is used to perform other parts of the performance, as appropriate. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-described performances can be executed in parallel, such as a performance using the number of held medals and a performance using the number of acquired medals. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not performed in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the number of acquired medals may exceed the number of medals held, but when such a situation occurs, a different effect is executed. In this way, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of determination targets are used and the results are combined.

[About operations when errors occur]
Error-related operations will be described below with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when an error in which the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). In FIGS. 94(a1) to (a3), from a state where there are 1336 game medals (FIG. 94(a1)), the count button 171 is operated (FIG. 94(a2)), and all the game medals are lent out. As a result of the transmission to the machine 700, a series of steps until the value of the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (FIG. 94 (a3)) is shown. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit of the number of game medals, and when a winning combination with a payout is won and the sum of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state occurs. (The response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 50). In this overflow state, the payout-based addition process is not executed and the overflow state is in a waiting state for resolution, which can be said to be a type of error. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171 to transfer the number of game medals to the lending machine 700. In FIGS. 94(b1) to (b4), the number of game medals changes from the upper limit value (FIG. 94(b1)) to an overflow state (FIG. 94(b2)) after winning a combination with a payout. After that, press and hold the count button 171 (FIG. 94(b3), move 50 as the number of game medals to the lending machine 700, and decrease the value of the number of game medals display device 170 by 1), and the overflow state will be resolved (FIG. 94(b3). The series of steps up to b4)) is shown. Note that the message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 94(b4) indicates that the overflow condition has been cleared, and is displayed for several seconds and then erased. Furthermore, when the overflow condition is resolved, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed for a long time, but if the count button 171 is not pressed for a long time, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly pressing the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171.

In the above embodiment, the game control unit 302 is configured to detect various errors that hinder the progress of the game (for example, the error in FIG. 9(b)). Since these errors require the store's response, the game is prevented from progressing and the errors are notified. 95(c1)-(c3) show a series of flows from a state where no error has occurred (FIG. 95(c1)) to a state where a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred (FIG. 95(c2)), and then the store takes action and the reset button R is operated to resolve the error (FIG. 95(c3)). The message "Error E0 has been resolved" in FIG. 95(c3) indicates that the error that has occurred (in this example, the medal count control unit disconnection error) has been resolved, and is displayed for a few seconds and then erased. The reset button R is a button for sending a reset signal to each control unit, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, there are errors related to the game control unit 302 that need to be cleared by the store's operation (for example, the abnormal game sequence error and the chip ID number mismatch in FIG. 9(b), hereinafter referred to as game control error, etc.), and errors related to the medal count control unit 350 that can be cleared by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal count control error). Compared to game control errors, medal count control errors are errors that do not have a serious impact on game progress. For this reason, if these errors occur at the same time, it is considered that the game control error with the highest importance is prioritized and cleared. An example of the operation when such a configuration is adopted will be described below. Note that in the following explanation, examples of medal count control unit disconnection error and overflow state will be explained, but errors related to the game control unit 302 and medal count control unit 350 are not limited to these errors, and can be applied to errors that employ a similar clearing method.

FIG. 96(d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and it is assumed that a winning combination with a payout is entered from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 96(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the user to operate the counting button 171 in order to release the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the count button 171, but here it is assumed that a medal number control section disconnection error occurs before this operation is performed (the game control error and the medal number control error overlap). . FIG. 96(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 96(d2) has been cleared and a message indicating that a medal number control unit disconnection error has occurred is displayed. Note that in the above example, the message indicating the overflow state (Fig. 96 (d2)) is cleared when a disconnection error occurs in the medal number control section. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred over the message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred, or display a message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section. Messages related to both errors may be displayed. Furthermore, when displaying messages related to both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from a display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where a game control error and a medal number control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the overflow state is not canceled because the counting process is not executed. At this time, a message indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid is displayed. In addition to the message shown in FIG. 96(d3), when the count button 171 is operated, the operation of the count button 171 is invalid, and the disconnection error in the medal number control section is first resolved. A message is displayed prompting you to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to process the medal number control unit disconnection error with priority.

It is assumed that the store then takes action and the reset button R is operated to resolve the error and return to the overflow state (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal number control error). FIG. 96(d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the medal number control unit disconnection error has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 96(d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that in FIG. 96(d2) is displayed. Thereafter, by operating the counting button 171 as described with reference to FIG. 94, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be released. FIGS. 96(d7) and (d8) show that the overflow state has been resolved by pressing and holding the counting button 171 in the same way as FIGS. 94(b3) and (b4). In this case, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals after the overflow condition is resolved.

In order to achieve the above operation, it is also possible to prevent the process corresponding to the operation of the operating means used to resolve the medal count control error (in the above example, the count button 171) from being executed while a game control error is occurring. Figures 97(e1) to (e3) show that the state goes from one in which no error has occurred (Figure 97(e1)) to one in which a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred (Figure 97(e2)), and that although the count button 171 (the operating means for releasing the overflow state) has been operated while this error is occurring, a message indicating that the operation is invalid (counting process is not executed) is displayed (Figure 97(e3)).

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the operation means for clearing the game control error and the operation means for clearing the medal count control error are different. Here, for example, the error clearing operation means for clearing the game control error and the medal count control error may be the same, such that both errors can be cleared by the reset button R. In addition, the error clearing operation means in this case may be operable by the player, or may not be operable (for example, an operation means installed inside the gaming machine). In this configuration, when a game control error occurs while a medal count control error is occurring, the game control error is cleared by operating the error clearing operation means (the medal count control error is not cleared, and the game control error is cleared preferentially), so that the game control error with the highest importance can be resolved preferentially.

[About notification of counting process (1)]
In a situation advantageous to the player, a performance to liven up the game may be executed, but the configuration described below is such that the volume of this performance is reduced while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). This provides a case where the sound is lowered (or muted). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the performance, and to allow the player to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of count notification. Note that, hereinafter, the count notification based on the change in the performance sound volume will be referred to as count notification A. Note that here we will mainly explain a configuration that changes the volume of the performance by counting processing, but a configuration that changes the performance in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, a change in volume, a change in sound quality, a change in display) (a part of the lamp may change, the color of the lamp, the lighting mode may change).

In some cases, the so-called demo effect is not executed when the player is in an advantageous state (e.g., AT state, bonus state), but is executed when the player is in an unfavorable state (e.g., normal state). In this configuration, the effect in the advantageous state for the player will continue to be executed. The counting notification A above allows the player to know that the counting process is being executed even in this configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification A is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the effects caused by the last stop operation on the reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo effect). It may also be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration is adopted in which the volume of the performance is reduced (or muted) as time passes since the last stop operation was performed on the reels (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption). In this case, the degree of each volume reduction may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the reduction in the performance volume due to the count notification A. Further, in the case where performance volume reduction due to passage of time and execution of count notification A overlap, a configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to volume reduction due to count notification A.

On the other hand, when any of the reels are spinning, the game is in progress, and the effects that are executed are of higher importance. For this reason, the configuration may be such that counting notification A is not executed when any of the reels are spinning.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A that is being executed is terminated (for example, the volume that has been changed is returned) in response to an operation on some operation means.

In addition, in the above description, it is determined whether or not to output the counting sound depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, as shown in FIG. 63), and that the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, 63), but when the above-mentioned count notification A is executed, a count sound corresponding to such a count process may be output. Also, for example, while the above counting notification A is executed only when all reels have stopped rotating, the counting sound can be output at any time in response to the counting process. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a counting sound is output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here can be changed while changing the volume depending on the situation, for example, set the volume to 50% while the reels are rotating, and set the volume to 100% while the reels are stopped. You may also add Further, it is also possible to combine not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, a count display related to the counting process, and a combination thereof) with the counting notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and allowing the counting display to be performed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). (while the reels are spinning, only the counting sound is output). In addition, as another example, the counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting sound is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). After that, execution is allowed (only the counting sound is output while the reels are rotating).

[Regarding notification of counting process (2)]
In the above explanation, we have mentioned a configuration for outputting a counting sound according to the counting process, such as determining whether or not to output a counting sound depending on the number of sheets counted (e.g., Figure 63), or varying the counting sound depending on the operation time of the counting button 171 (e.g., Figure 63).

When the player is in an advantageous state, a special effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below allows the counting sound to be output while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process), and provides for cases in which the sound effect for the advantageous state is maintained. With this configuration, the sound effect for the advantageous state may be maintained even during the counting process, so that interest in the game does not decrease. The counting sound also allows the player to know that the counting process is being performed. This counting sound is an example of a counting notification. Note that hereinafter, this counting notification using the counting sound will be referred to as counting notification B.

Although the count notification B has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification B is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the final stop operation for the reels has been performed and all reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo performance). It may also be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

In addition, depending on the operation during play, an effect may be executed in response to this. For example, as described above, when all reels have stopped spinning, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may be triggered to execute an effect for the next game, and the operation of an operating means for the effect may be triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, the configuration may be such that counting notification B is not executed after any operation of an operating means has been performed.

In addition, in the above description, the case where the counting notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed were explained, but for example, when there is a counting sound of the first aspect and a counting sound of the second aspect as the counting sound ( For example, the melody may be different, the tone color, the number of notes, the volume, etc. may be different). In other words, the case where the count notification B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output, and the case where the count notification B is not executed is read as the case where the count sound of the second aspect is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second aspect is a type of sound that does not significantly interfere with the production of an advantageous state, the counting process can be executed without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the game is inside.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, when the counting effect of the first mode is executed, when the counting sound of the second mode is output, when the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , respectively. Since there are various types of performances, not just audio, for example, if the counting performance of the second aspect is a type of performance that does not interfere much with the production of an advantageous state, it can be done without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of counting process notification]
Specific examples of the configuration of the counting notifications (counting notification A, counting notification B) described above will be described below with reference to Figs. 98 to 100. Fig. 98 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a period during which the counting sound is allowed to be output for the counting process is set. Fig. 99 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of Fig. 98(a), and Fig. 100 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of Fig. 98(b).

98(a) and 98(b) both show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when a bet operation is performed. This is an example of operation. FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b) show a period during which this counting sound is permitted and a period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. It is assumed that in the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output, except when the counting sound is output.

The example in FIG. 98(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 99(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 99(a2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at timing (a2) after the start operation. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 99(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed as the value acquired in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, suppose that the counting button 171 is pressed and held during the period from after the third stop operation until before the bet button for the next game is operated. Figure 98(a) shows the operation period of this counting button 171. Below, the timings (a3) to (a7) shown in Figure 98(a) will be explained in order.

First, timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 99 (a3) shows that, at this timing (a3), the performance when winning a prize (here, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed.

The next timing (a4) is when the counting button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a4), and the AT sound also continues. Then, as a result of the counting button 171 being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the counting process is being carried out, and it is shown that the number of game medals has begun to decrease as the counting process has begun.

The following timing (a5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (a5), as shown in FIG. 99(a5), the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (a6) is when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display in FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a6). Also, because the counting button 171 has not been operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT performance sound has resumed. Note that the words "Counting" in the box in the upper left corner of the screen have been erased.

The next timing (a7) is when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a7). In addition, the AT performance sound is being output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (a4) and (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

Next, in the example of FIG. 98(b), the timing (b1) when the AT state starts is shown, and FIG. 100(b1) shows the state at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during play. As an example of what happens in this case, FIG. 100(b2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. Also, as shown in FIG. 100(b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed as the "owned" value in the upper left box, and the cumulative number of game medals acquired in the AT state is displayed in the upper right box.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the first stop operation is performed until immediately after the next game start operation. FIG. 98(b) shows the operation period of this count button 171. Timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 98(b) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and as shown in FIG. 100(b3), the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 100(b2) continues. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The next timing (b4) is after the third stop operation and while the counting button 171 continues to be pressed and held. Figure 100 (b4) shows how, at this timing (b4), the performance that occurs when a winning combination is achieved (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed. Note that, at this timing (b4), the counting sound is not permitted and the AT performance sound is being output. And, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the box at the top left of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b5) is when the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is being pressed and held. At this timing (b5), as shown in FIG. 100(b5), the display in FIG. 100(b4) continues, but the AT sound is not being output, and the counting sound is being output. And, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

At the next timing (b6), the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is being pressed and held. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 100(b4) continues, as shown in FIG. 100(b6). In addition, the operation of the bet button 132 ends the permitted period for the counting sound, and the output of the AT sound effect is resumed. Note that, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (b7), and the AT effect sound is output. Note that as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b8) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 100(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b8). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT performance sound is output. Note that the text "Counting" in the upper frame on the left side of the screen has been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification A. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification A in which the AT performance sound is no longer output during the counting process. Furthermore, the operation at timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification B. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification B in which the AT performance sound is sometimes maintained during the counting process and in other cases the counting sound is output.

[About display and presentation based on information from the medal number control unit]
In the present embodiment, the game control unit 302 controls the game medals by the medal number control state command (see FIGS. 7 and 11) that is sent from the medal number control unit 350 periodically (every 5.9 m8 ms in FIG. 7). Information such as numbers can be grasped (Figure 25). Then, some of this information is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by a security command (FIG. 7) that is sent periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 7) from the game control unit 302. The first sub-control unit 400 can control various displays and effects based on this information. Furthermore, the player can grasp this information through these displays and effects.

Here, in the above configuration, if the time it takes for communication to be established between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is slower than the time it takes for communication to be established between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on, a security command will be sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the medal count control state command from the medal count control unit 350 has not yet arrived at the game control unit 302. Since the security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal count control unit 350, if various displays and presentation controls are performed based on the information contained in this security command, the player will be given information that differs from the actual state.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, a security command may be sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the first security command after the power is turned on after receiving the medal number control state command. Further, the security command may be sent after providing a sufficient waiting time.

In addition, until communication is established between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured not to execute processing based on a security command even if it receives the command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to ignore security commands received several times after power-on, or to ignore security commands received until a certain waiting time has elapsed.

In addition, information indicating the communication status between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 may be included in the security command, and when the game control unit 302 receives a medal count control status command (communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is established), information indicating normal communication may be included in the security command and sent, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be allowed to execute various displays and presentation controls on the condition that this information is included. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given information that differs from the actual status.

Here, we will provide additional explanation of the operations that occur from when the above security command is sent until the next security command is sent. For example, if there is a change in information such as the number of game medals played between security commands, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in the various displays and presentation controls. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in conjunction with game control (Figure 7), and by including the latest information in these various processing commands and using this information to perform various displays and presentation controls, it is possible to ensure that the latest information is reflected.

[Regarding the timing of sending and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (1)]
Hereinafter, based on the configuration of the slot machine 100 described above, modified examples of the transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing will be described using FIGS. 101 to 104. In the following description, the configurations explained in FIGS. 1 to 100 will be referred to as appropriate, and for contradictory configurations, the words and symbols in this example will be given priority.

In the slot machine 100 described above, information is transmitted and received between each control section according to the operation of the operating means. Transmission and reception of information between each control unit is performed according to a predetermined cycle. An example of a communication cycle between each control unit will be described below using FIG. 101.

FIG. 101 shows the communication cycle (time required for timer interruption) of signals between the game control section 302, the medal number control section 350, the lending machine 700, and various devices connected thereto. Note that signals transmitted and received regardless of operations are omitted in this diagram.

For example, when the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the game control unit 302 that receives this operation executes the corresponding process and transmits a coin insertion command to the medal count control unit 350 (see [Operation of the game control unit 302 by insert operation (transmission of insert command, etc.)]), the medal count control unit 350 that receives this insert command executes the corresponding process and transmits a response command to the game control unit 302 (see [Operation when a game control priority command is received], [Operation when an insert command is received], [Transmission of medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]), and the game control unit 302 that receives this response command executes the corresponding process (see [Operation when a medal count control command is received]). In FIG. 101, signals are transmitted and received in the order of arrow A → arrow B → arrow C. In addition, between arrow B and arrow C, an update process (transmission of arrow F) of the game medal count display device 170 is executed. In addition, after arrow C, a process (transmission of arrow D) related to effects such as insert sound is executed. In the above example, the game control unit 302 executes the processing related to effects such as the insertion sound after receiving the response command, but the configuration may be such that the processing related to effects such as the insertion sound is executed without waiting for this response command.

For example, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the game control unit 302 that accepts this operation executes the corresponding process and transmits a settlement command to the medal count control unit 350 (see [Operation of the game control unit 302 by settlement operation (transmission of settlement command, etc.)]), the medal count control unit 350 that accepts this settlement command executes the corresponding process and transmits a response command to the game control unit 302 (see [Operation when a game control priority command is received], [Operation when a settlement command is received], [Transmission of medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]), and the game control unit 302 that accepts this response command executes the corresponding process (see [Operation when a medal count control command is received]). In FIG. 101, signals are transmitted and received in the order of arrow A → arrow B → arrow C. Note that between arrow B and arrow C, an update process of the game medal count display device 170 (transmission of arrow F) is executed, and after arrow C, a process related to the effects such as the insertion sound (transmission of arrow D) is executed. In addition, in the case of a configuration that does not use response commands, in FIG. 101, signals are sent and received in the order of arrow A → arrow B. Also, after arrow B, an update process for the game medal count display device 170 (transmission of arrow F) is executed, and after arrow A, a process related to effects such as a settlement sound (transmission of arrow D) is executed.

For example, when the count button 171 is operated, the medal count control unit 350, which has received this operation, executes a process to determine the planned count number and the counted number, and sends a counting notification to the lending machine 700 (see [Setting the planned count number (medal count control unit 350)] and [Counting notification (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]). After this counting notification is sent, the number of game medals is subtracted and the planned count number is cleared. The medal count display device 170 displays this updated value of the game medal count. The count number and the updated value of the game medal count are also sent to the game control unit 302. Note that the configuration may also be such that only the count number is sent to the game control unit 302 without sending the updated value of the game medal count. In FIG. 101, signals are sent and received in the order of arrow E → arrow G → arrow C. Between arrows G and C, an update process (arrow F) of the game medal count display device 170 is executed, and after arrow C, a process related to the counting effect (transmission of arrow H) is executed. A security command with a 100 ms cycle is used to transmit information related to counting from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 (arrow H instead of arrow D). Also, the first sub-control unit 400 takes a processing time (for example, 16.667 ms) from reception to sound output.

As explained above, information is transmitted and received between the time when the operating means is operated and the corresponding action is executed, and there are various timings for this transmission and reception. For example, since the count notification for the counting operation is performed at a communication cycle of 300 ms between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, the waiting time until the corresponding operation is performed is long compared to other operations. Therefore, depending on the situation, it may be better to cancel the process corresponding to the counting operation, or it may be better to execute the process corresponding to the counting operation in a different order from the order of the operations. In addition, there are cases where the results of not only one counting operation but multiple counting operations are treated as a single piece of information, and the actions that correspond to each counting operation are not limited to the results of multiple counting operations. It may be desirable to perform an action. An example of such processing will be described below, and then an example of operation based on this processing will be described.

Figure 102 shows an example of the count notification sending process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process of Figure 27, and is a modified example of the flowchart of Figure 34. Note that this flowchart describes characteristic processes, and omits processes unrelated to the subsequent operation examples.

First, in step S3A01, which is executed first, if the timing of counting processing is reached (the value of the counting notification interval timer is 0), the process proceeds to step S3A02, otherwise, this process ends.

In step S3A02, if the number of sheets to be counted is not 0, proceed to step S3A03; otherwise, end this process.

In step S3A03, the number of medals to be counted and the number of game medals are compared, the smaller value is set as the number of medals to be counted, and the process proceeds to step S3A04.

In step S3A04, if the counted number is less than 50, the process advances to step S3A05; otherwise, the process advances to step S3A07.

In step S3A05, the count number set in step S3A03 is sent to the rental machine 700.

In step S3A06, the value of the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3A07, "50" is transmitted to lending machine 700 as the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3A08, the value "50" transmitted as the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3A09, the planned number of coins to be counted is set to 0, and this process ends.

Note that among the above processes, step S3A04, step S3A07, and step S3A08 are processes when the upper limit of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and the process may proceed from step S3A03 to step S3A05 without using these processes.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the sound control process (step S511) in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 60(a).

First, in step S5A01, which is executed first, if a security command has been received, the process proceeds to step S5A02, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5A03.

In step S5A02, information on the number of sheets to be counted is acquired from the security command, the value is added to the remaining count value, and the process proceeds to step S5A03.

In step S5A03, if the remaining count value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S5A04, otherwise this process ends.

In step S5A04, if the remaining count value is 5 or less, the process proceeds to step S5A05, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5A08.

In step S5A05, if the value of the number of game medals obtained from the security command is 0, proceed to step S5A06, otherwise proceed to step S5A07.

In step S5A06, the output of counting sound B and the counting completion sound is set, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A07, the output setting of counting sound A is performed, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A08, if the value of the number of game medals acquired from the security command is 0, the process proceeds to step S5A09, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5A10.

In step S5A09, the output setting of the counting sound C and the counting completion sound is performed, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A10, the counting sound D is set to be output, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A11, the remaining count value is updated to 0, and this process ends.

Here, an example of the counting sound set in the process of FIG. 103 will be explained using FIG. 104.

The counting process is performed based on the operation of the count button 171, which can be a short press (operation time less than 500 ms) or a long press (operation time 500 ms or more). Of these, a short press adds 1 to the planned count number, while a long press sets the planned count number to 50. Furthermore, if the long press continues for a predetermined time (2 seconds or more in the example of Figure 59), automatic counting will be performed (the planned count number will continue to be set to 50 even if the count button 171 is released). The time for determining whether to press it short, long, or automatic count is one example, and other values may be used. For example, a counter value set to an initial value (192) may be subtracted at regular intervals (decrementing by 1 for every 28 0.745 ms timer interrupts), and depending on the counter value, a short press (158 or more, operation time less than approximately 730 ms), a long press (157 or less, operation time between approximately 730 ms and less than 4000 ms), or automatic counting (0, operation time greater than approximately 4000 ms) may be determined. Note that the following examples will be described assuming that these operation times are used.

In the above example, the count notification is transmitted at a cycle of 300 ms, but it is physically difficult to briefly press the count button 171 three or more times during this period. The above process is based on the assumption that 5 times is the limit even if the short press operation is performed 3 or more times, and if the number of sheets counted is 5 or less, the counting sound A or counting sound B is output, and the number of sheets counted is is 6 or more, it is configured to output counting sound C or counting sound D. Note that if the number of sheets to be counted is 6 or more (in this example, when counting sound C or counting sound D is output), it is assumed that the counting button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and counting continues. Since there is a high possibility that this is being executed, a configuration is adopted in which, in this case, the volume of main control related sounds including the start sound (stop sound, etc.) is reduced. Note that this threshold value for determining a short press operation and a long press operation is just an example, and may be 0 or any value of 6 or more. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the input sound is reduced by determining a long press operation or an automatic counting state.

In the process of FIG. 103, if the counted number is 5 or less and the number of game medals after counting is not 0, counting sound A is set. Here, the case where the counted number is 5 or less corresponds to the case where 5 or fewer short presses are performed. FIG. 104(a) shows that counting sound A is output when the number of game medals goes from 50 to 49 with one short press. It also shows that counting sound A is output when the number of game medals goes from 50 to 48 with two short presses. In this example, counting sound A is a "pick" sound that is output once regardless of the number of counted medals. Note that in this example, the length (output time) of counting sound A is 250 ms.

In the process of FIG. 103, if the number of counted medals is 5 or less and the number of game medals after counting is 0, counting sound B is set. The case where the number of counted medals is 5 or less corresponds to the case where the number of counted medals is 5 or less, or the case where the number of game medals is 5 or less and ... Additionally, the length of the count completion sound is 3000 ms (and so on).

In the process of FIG. 103, if the number of counted medals is 6 or more and the number of game medals after counting is 0, counting sound C is set. The case where the number of counted medals is 6 or more corresponds to a case where the number of game medals is 6 or more and the button is pressed for a long time. In theory, it is possible to make the number of counted medals 6 or more when the button is pressed for a short time 6 or more times, but this is not practical because it requires the operation of the counting button 171 within 300 ms. FIG. 104(a) shows that the counting sound C is output when the number of game medals becomes 0 from 6 or more by a single long press. In this example, the counting sound C is output, which is composed of a melody shorter than the melody used in the counting sound D (a melody in which the counting sound D ends midway) and a "ding-dong" sound, and then a counting completion sound that notifies the completion of counting is output in sequence. In this example, the length (output time) of the counting sound C is 750 ms.

In the process of FIG. 103, if the number of counted coins is 6 or more and the number of game medals after counting is not 0, counting sound D is set. Here, the case where the number of counted coins is 6 or more corresponds to a case where the number of game medals is 6 or more and the button is pressed for a long time. Note that it is theoretically possible to make the number of counted coins 6 or more when the button is pressed for a short time 6 or more times, but this is not practical because it requires the operation of the counting button 171 within 300 ms. FIG. 104(a) shows that the counting sound D is output when the number of game medals goes from 100 to 50 with one long press. In this example, the counting sound D is output, which is composed of a melody longer than the melody used in the counting sound C and a "ding-dong" sound. Note that in this example, the length (output time) of the counting sound D is 1000 ms.

The length of the melody for the counting sound C may be varied depending on the number of coins counted. Figure 104(b) shows an example of five types of counting sound C (counting sound C1 to counting sound C5) corresponding to the number of coins counted. This configuration makes it easier for the player to grasp the number of coins counted.

Counting sound C is a shortened sound obtained by deleting the latter part of the first half of the melody of counting sound D, but it may also be a shortened sound obtained by deleting the former part of the melody. In this case, the connection between the first half (the melody in this example) and the latter half (the "ding-dong" in this example) can be made the same for counting sound C and counting sound D.

Although an example in which the same counting completion sound is used has been described, a configuration may be adopted in which different counting completion sounds are used, such as using different counting completion sounds in accordance with the counting sound. Further, the counting completion sound may be the voice of a model motif such as a character employed in the model. Further, in the above example, a common voice is used, but the voices of different characters may be used. For example, the value of the count may be recognized by outputting a count completion sound in the voice of a different character depending on the value of the count.

In the above example, a counting sound is output for each game medal number (counted number) counted (sent to the lending machine 700 in different counting notifications) in different counting cycles (mainly consecutive counting cycles), so multiple counting sounds may overlap depending on the timing (for example, FIG. 130 described later). However, this configuration is not limited, and for example, a configuration in which a subsequent counting sound is not output until the previously output counting sound ends may be used. In this case, a configuration in which a counting sound based on counting is started to be output for the counting process (counting notification) after the output of the counting sound ends, or a condition such as the passage of time after the output of the counting sound ends may be used, or such a condition may be combined with another condition (for example, a condition related to the number of medals counted).

In the process of FIG. 103, the number of game medals and the number of counted medals are used as the criteria for judgment, and the operation of the count button 171 when setting this counted number (short press, long press, automatic count) is not used in the judgment. For example, when automatic counting is being performed, the counting sound is set according to the conditions in FIG. 103, so that counting sound D may be followed by counting sound B or counting sound C, or only counting sound B or counting sound C may be output. With this configuration, it may be possible to make the counting sound correspond to the number of medals counted.

Note that the operation of the counting button 171 (short press, long press, automatic counting) may be used to determine the counting sound. For example, when automatic counting is in progress, automatic counting sound G may be output. In this case, the automatic counting sound (longer than the counting completion sound) may be used as the automatic counting sound G.

Further, in determining which counting sound to output, the determination criterion is not limited to the number of game medals and the number of counted coins, but may also be based on, for example, the number of game medals before and after counting. Furthermore, even if the configuration is such that the counting sound D (melody + kinkhorn) is initially output as the automatic counting sound G, and a notification sound is added to notify that automatic counting has started when 4000 ms has elapsed. Alternatively, a sound may be added to notify that automatic counting is in progress after the counting button 171 is turned off.

In addition, if the counting sound and the betting sound overlap, the volume of the betting sound is lowered so as not to interfere with the counting sound. Note that the volume of not only the betting sound but also sounds related to the progress of the game (for example, start operation sounds, stop sounds, payout sounds, settlement sounds) may be lowered. In addition to lowering the volume, the volume may be set to 0 or some sounds may not be output.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was explained in which the count is notified by sound, but notification by a predetermined light emission from a lamp or the like, notification by a display means, or one or more notifications including a lamp or a display means is also possible. The configuration may be such that the notification by means is performed in combination with a counting sound. Further, the display means may include a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display means for displaying an effect) different from the medal number display means.

In addition, when combining multiple notification means, a sound corresponding to the number of counting operations or the number of game medals is output, while another notification means (for example, a lamp) outputs a sound that corresponds to the number of counting operations or the number of game medals, while another notification means (for example, a lamp) outputs a sound that corresponds to the number of counting operations or the number of game medals. It is also possible to configure the notification contents to be different for each notification means, such as by changing the notification contents. Alternatively, another notification means such as a lamp may be configured to perform counting notification only when a certain condition is satisfied. Examples of such configurations include a configuration in which notification is executed only when the number of game medals reaches 0, and a configuration in which notification is executed when a predetermined number (for example, 1000) or more of gaming value is counted by one long press operation or automatic counting. There are several configurations, such as a configuration in which a notification is issued when short press operations are performed continuously (an alert notification indicating that counting is possible with one long press), etc.

In addition to the above example, automatic counting is performed when 4000 ms of operation of the counting button 171 has elapsed, and the number of game medals is calculated when 2000 ms of further operation has elapsed (6000 ms of operation of the counting button 171). There is also a configuration in which the number of sheets to be counted increases (accelerates the counting process) according to the operating time of the counting button 171, such as counting all at once. There is also a configuration shown in FIG. 67 that accelerates such counting processing. Furthermore, as in the example of FIG. 68, there is also a configuration in which the counting process is slowed down when the number of game medals falls below a certain number. Even in such a configuration, the configuration of the counting sound described above can be applied.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals after counting becomes 0 due to automatic counting or long-press counting, or when the counting is about to end, the updating speed of the counting (mainly the display of the gaming value display means) may be slowed down.

In addition, it may be provided with a countable notification lamp that indicates that counting is possible, a lamp that notifies depending on the counting status such as counting or automatic counting, and the notification color of the countable notification lamp. The configuration may be such that the counting status is notified by.

In addition, in this embodiment, the counting sound is output based on the information of the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals, and the counting sound is output after the timing when the update of the game medal count display device 170 starts. If the counting sound were output before the update of the game medal count display device 170 starts, there is a possibility that this sound would be mistaken for another sound (for example, an error sound or a warning sound); however, by outputting the counting sound after the update of the game medal count display device 170 starts, such a problem may be prevented.

In addition, in the above example, the configuration is such that a counting sound is output according to the number of sheets counted and the number of game values (for example, the number of game medals), but for example, pachinko machines also handle counting operations and the number of game values electronically. It can also be applied to such game machines.

Examples of operations based on the contents described in FIGS. 101 to 104 will be described below using FIGS. 105 to 130.

In the example of FIG. 105, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 105 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX bet button 132 is operated after the scheduled number of coins to be counted is set and before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). In FIG. 105, the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 50 to 47) based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the number of game medals display device 170 is the value after the subtraction. It is shown that it has been updated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the planned number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (47 minus 1 to become 46), the planned number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first.

In the example of FIG. 106, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point (same as in FIG. 105).

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 106 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 after the game information notification is sent but before the counting notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of tokens scheduled to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of tokens scheduled to be counted) is sent to the rental machine 700, and the number of gaming medals is updated (1 is subtracted from 47 to 46. ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that compared to the example of FIG. 105, it differs in that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is performed after the game information notification is sent, but even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 107, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the count button 171 is pressed briefly a second time, and the planned count number is incremented by 1, becoming 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 107 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 107 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 50 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of tokens scheduled to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of tokens scheduled to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of game medals is updated (2 is subtracted from 47 to 45). ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Note that although the number of times the count button 171 is operated is different from the example in FIG. It will be done.

In the example of FIG. 108, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point.

In addition, in this example, after the first operation of the count button 171 and after the game information notification is sent, the count button 171 is pressed a second time, adding 1 to the planned count number, setting it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 108 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 108 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 after the game information notification is sent but before the counting notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of tokens scheduled to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of tokens scheduled to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of game medals is updated (2 is subtracted from 47 to 45). ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it is different in that the second operation of the counting button 171 is performed after the game information notification, and that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is performed after the game information notification is sent, but even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 109, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point.

Assume that the MAX bet button 132 is operated subsequent to the above-mentioned operation of the counting button 171 and before the counting notification is transmitted (the counting process is executed). In FIG. 109, the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 50 to 47) based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the number of game medals display device 170 is changed to the value after the subtraction. It is shown that it has been updated.

Furthermore, it is assumed that following the operation of the MAX bet button 132 described above, a second short press operation of the count button 171 is performed. FIG. 109 shows that this second operation of the counting button 171 was performed before the game information notification was sent, and that 1 was added to the planned number of coins to be counted and 2 was set. At this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of tokens scheduled to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of tokens scheduled to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of game medals is updated (2 is subtracted from 47 to 45). ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Note that when compared with the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the counting button 171 is operated for the second time after the MAX bet button 132 is operated, but in this example as well, the counting button 171 is operated after the operation The gaming value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132 is first subtracted.

In the example of FIG. 110, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 70, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is determined that the count button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 110 shows that the number of game medals and their display have not been updated at the time of setting the planned number of medals to be counted.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 110 shows that the number of game medals is updated (70 minus 3 to become 67) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of tokens scheduled to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of tokens scheduled to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of gaming medals is updated (50 is subtracted from 67 to 17 ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the count button 171 is operated by a long press instead of a short press, but in this example as well, the MAX bet button that was operated after the count button 171 was operated. The subtraction of the gaming value according to the operation at 132 is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 111, the number of game medals is 70 after the count notification has been sent and received, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, it is determined that the count button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 111 shows that the number of game medals and their display have not been updated when the planned number of medals to be counted is set.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 111 shows that the number of game medals is updated (70 minus 3 to become 67) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Next, assume that the count button 171 is pressed briefly before the game information notification is sent. In this case, the number of coins to be counted is already set to the upper limit of 50, so the number of coins to be counted is not changed.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (67 minus 50 to become 17), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Note that when compared with the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the count button 171 is operated by a long press instead of a short press, and the count button 171 is operated by a short press after the MAX bet button 132 is operated. However, in this example as well, the gaming value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which is operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first.

In the example of FIG. 112, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 112 shows that the number of game medals and the display thereof are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 1 to become 49), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the counting notification is sent but before the loan notification is sent. Figure 112 shows that the number of game medals is updated (49 is subtracted by 3 to become 46) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process, but depending on the timing, as in the above example, after the game medal count display device 170 is updated by operating the counting button 171, the game value may be subtracted in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132. Note that compared to the example in Figure 105, the difference is that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 occurs after the counting notification has been sent.

In the example of FIG. 113, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 113 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX bet button 132 is operated after the scheduled number of coins to be counted is set and before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). In FIG. 113, the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 3 to 0) based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the number of game medals display device 170 is the value after the subtraction. It is shown that it has been updated.

Thereafter, when the timing for transmitting the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of medals scheduled to be counted, but in this example, the number of game medals is smaller than the number of medals scheduled to be counted, which is 1. In this case, the smaller of the planned number of coins to be counted and the number of game medals is set as the number of coins to be counted (step S3A03 in FIG. 102), but since the number of game medals is 0, the number of coins to be counted becomes 0, and counting is not performed. result. That is, the number of game medals remains 0, and the planned number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0. Note that since counting is not being performed, no counting sound is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Further, in the above example, since the number of game medals becomes 0 due to this subtraction, the counting process is not executed even though the counting button 171 is operated. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is smaller (3), and the game value has been subtracted according to the operation of the MAX bet button 132. The difference is that no counting process is performed.

In the example of FIG. 114, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 2, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 114 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, suppose that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). However, since the number of medals required for a MAX BET (3) is not available, the MAX BET operation is invalid. Figure 114 shows that although the MAX BET button 132 is operated before the game information notification is sent, neither the number of medals nor the value on the game medal count display device 170 has changed.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of medals to be played is updated (2 minus 1 to become 1), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. However, in the above example, the operation of the MAX bet button 132 is invalidated because the value of the number of game medals is insufficient for subtracting the gaming value according to the operation of the MAX bet button 132. Therefore, only the game medal number display device 170 is updated by operating the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is smaller (2), and the game value is not subtracted according to the operation of the MAX bet button 132. The points are different.

In the example of FIG. 115, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the count button 171 is pressed briefly a second time, and the planned count number is incremented by 1 to set it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 115 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 115 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted to 0) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Thereafter, when the timing for transmitting the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of medals scheduled to be counted, but in this example, the number of game medals 0 is smaller than the number of medals scheduled to be counted, which is 2. In this case, the smaller of the planned number of coins to be counted and the number of game medals is set as the number of coins to be counted (step S3A03 in FIG. 102), but since the number of game medals is 0, the number of coins to be counted becomes 0, and counting is not executed. The result is that it is not possible. That is, the number of game medals remains 0, and the planned number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0. Note that since counting is not being performed, no counting sound is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Furthermore, in the above example, the game medal count becomes 0 due to this subtraction, so the counting process is not executed even though the counting button 171 is operated. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the differences are that the value of the game medal count at the start of the operation example is less (3), the counting button 171 is operated twice, and the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is performed, so the counting process is not executed.

In the example of FIG. 116, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the second short press operation of the count button 171 is performed, and 1 is added to the number of sheets to be counted, thereby indicating that 2 is set. . At this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed. FIG. 116 shows that the number of game medals and their display are not updated immediately after the counting buttons 171 are operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 116 shows that the number of medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to become 1) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Thereafter, when the timing for transmitting the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals scheduled to be counted, but in this example, the number of game medals 1 is smaller than the number of medals scheduled to be counted 2. In this case, the smaller of the number of coins to be counted or the number of game medals is set as the number of coins to be counted (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In the case of this example, the number of game medals, 1, is set as the number to be counted, a counting process is executed for this, the number of game medals is updated (1 is subtracted from 1 to 0), and the planned number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0. The value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is performed first. Furthermore, in the above example, because the number of game medals falls below the planned count number due to this subtraction, a value (number of game medals) different from the planned count number becomes the target of the counting process. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the differences are that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (4), that the count button 171 has been operated twice, and that the counting process is performed with a value different from the planned count number.

In the example of FIG. 117, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point.

Let us assume that following the operation of the counting button 171 described above, the MAX BET button 132 is operated before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 117 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to become 1) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Furthermore, it is assumed that following the operation of the MAX bet button 132 described above, a second short press operation of the count button 171 is performed. FIG. 117 shows that this second operation of the counting button 171 was performed before the game information notification was sent, and that 1 was added to the planned number of coins to be counted and 2 was set. At this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed.

Thereafter, when the timing for transmitting the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals scheduled to be counted, but in this example, the number of game medals 1 is smaller than the number of medals scheduled to be counted 2. In this case, the smaller of the number of coins to be counted or the number of game medals is set as the number of coins to be counted (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In the case of this example, the number of game medals, 1, is set as the number to be counted, a counting process is executed for this, the number of game medals is updated (1 is subtracted from 1 to 0), and the planned number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0. The value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Further, in the above example, since the number of game medals to be counted is added after this subtraction, the number of game medals is less than the number of game medals to be counted, and a value (number of game medals) different from the number of game medals to be counted becomes the target of the counting process. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is smaller (4), and the count button 171 is operated once before and after the MAX bet button 132 is operated. The difference is that the counting process is executed using a value different from the number of sheets scheduled to be counted.

In the example of FIG. 118, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, it is determined that the count button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, the count button 171 is pressed briefly after the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 by a long press, but since the number of sheets to be counted is already set to the upper limit of 50, the number of sheets to be counted is Not changed. Note that, at this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed. FIG. 118 shows that the number of game medals and their display are not updated immediately after the counting buttons 171 are operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 118 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Thereafter, when the timing for transmitting the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of medals scheduled to be counted, but in this example, the number of game medals, 47, is smaller than the number of medals scheduled to be counted, 50. In this case, the smaller of the number of coins to be counted or the number of game medals is set as the number of coins to be counted (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In the case of this example, the number of game medals, 47, is set as the number to be counted, a counting process is executed for this, the number of game medals is updated (47 is subtracted from 47 to 0), and the planned number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0. The value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound C) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Furthermore, in the above example, since the number of game medals falls below the number scheduled to be counted due to this subtraction, a value (number of game medals) different from the number scheduled to be counted becomes the target of the counting process. In addition, when compared with the example in FIG. 105, there are two points in which the operation of the counting button 171 is a long press and a short press, and the counting process is executed with a value different from the number of sheets scheduled to be counted. different.

In the example of FIG. 119, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, it is determined that the count button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 119 shows that the number of game medals and their display have not been updated when the planned number of medals to be counted is set. In addition, in this example, it is possible to set the number of game medals to be counted that exceeds the number of game medals, but if you try to set the number of game medals to be counted that exceeds the current number of game medals, the current number of game medals will be set as the number of game medals to be counted. (in this example, 4 is set).

Next, assume that the MAX bet button 132 is operated after the scheduled number of coins to be counted is set and before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). In FIG. 119, the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to 1) based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the number of game medals display device 170 is the value after the subtraction. It is shown that it has been updated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 50 is less than the planned count number of 1, which is the number of game medals. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the count number is set to 1, which is the number of game medals, and the counting process is executed for this, updating the number of game medals (subtracting 1 from 1 to 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound B in this case) is output.

As described above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the counting processing execution interval. Therefore, in the above example, when updating the game medal number display device 170, the game value corresponding to the operation of the MAX bet button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is subtracted first. Note that in the above example, the number of game medals is less than the number scheduled to be counted from the time of the long-press operation of the count button 171 (before the operation of the MAX bet button 132), but the gaming value is subtracted according to the operation of the MAX bet button 132. As a result, the number of game medals is further reduced, and subsequent counting processing targets a value (number of game medals) different from the number scheduled to be counted. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is smaller (4), and the operation of the counting button 171 is a long press instead of a short press. The difference is that the counting process is performed using a value different from the number of sheets scheduled to be counted.

In the example of FIG. 120, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 5, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that the count button 171 has been pressed and held for a long time, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, the count button 171 is pressed briefly after the planned count number is set to 50 by a long press, but since the planned count number is already set to the upper limit of 50, the planned count number is not changed. Note that even at this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. FIG. 120 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171. Note that in this example, it is possible to set a planned count number that exceeds the number of game medals, but if an attempt is made to set a planned count number that exceeds the current number of game medals, the current number of game medals may be set as the planned count number.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 120 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 5 to become 2) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Thereafter, when the timing for transmitting the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of medals scheduled to be counted, but in this example, the number of game medals, 2, is smaller than the number of medals scheduled to be counted, 50. In this case, the smaller of the number of coins to be counted or the number of game medals is set as the number of coins to be counted (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the number of game medals, 2, is set as the number of medals to be counted, the counting process is executed for this, the number of game medals is updated (2 is subtracted from 2, and becomes 0), and the number of planned medals to be counted is cleared to 0. The value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval of execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that in the above example, the number of game medals is lower than the number of game medals to be counted from the time of the long press operation of the counting button 171 (before the operation of the MAX BET button 132), but the number of game medals is further reduced by the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and the subsequent counting process targets a value (number of game medals) different from the number of game medals to be counted. Note that, compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (5), the operation of the counting button 171 is performed in two consecutive types, a long press and a short press, and the counting process is performed with a value different from the number of game medals to be counted.

In the example of FIG. 121, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 121 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 121 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 3 to 0) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Furthermore, it is assumed that following the operation of the MAX bet button 132 described above, a second short press operation of the count button 171 is performed. In FIG. 121, this second operation of the counting button 171 is performed before the game information notification is sent, but since the number of game medals is 0, the planned number of medals to be counted remains at 1 without being updated. It is shown that In this example, the number of coins to be counted is not updated (added) when the number of game medals is 0, but the number of coins to be counted may be updated regardless of the number of game medals. At this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed.

Suppose that the settlement button 134 is operated before the counting notification is subsequently transmitted (the counting process is executed). In FIG. 121, the number of game medals is updated (3 is added from 0 to 3) based on the operation of the settlement button 134 after the game information notification is sent but before the count notification is sent, and the game medal number display device 170 It is shown that the value of has been updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of tokens scheduled to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of tokens scheduled to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of gaming medals is updated (1 is subtracted from 3 to 2). ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval of execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first in updating the game medal count display device 170. Then, because the number of game medals becomes 0 due to this subtraction, the subsequent short press operation of the counting button 171 is not reflected in the number of medals to be counted. Furthermore, in the above example, the number of game medals increases to 3 due to the operation of the settlement button 134, so that the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted. Note that, compared to the example of FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is less (3), and although the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132 makes it impossible to execute the counting process once, the addition of the game value in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 makes it possible to execute the counting process. In this example, too, the subtraction of the gaming value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132 and the addition of the gaming value in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 are performed first, since they are performed after the operation of the counting button 171.

In the example of FIG. 122, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 122 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 122 shows that the number of medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to become 1) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Furthermore, it is assumed that following the operation of the MAX bet button 132 described above, a second short press operation of the count button 171 is performed. FIG. 122 shows that this second operation of the counting button 171 was performed before the game information notification was sent, and that 1 was added to the planned number of coins to be counted and 2 was set. At this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed.

Next, assume that the settlement button 134 is operated before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 122 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is added from 1 to 4) based on the operation of the settlement button 134 after the game information notification is sent but before the counting notification is sent, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (2 is subtracted from 4 to become 2), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound A in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval of execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first in updating the game medal number display device 170. Then, in a state where the game medal number becomes the same value (1) as the planned count number due to this subtraction, the counting button 171 is further pressed briefly, but this operation is reflected because the game medal number is not 0 in this state. Furthermore, in the above example, the operation of the settlement button 134 adds 3 to the game medal number, so that the game medal number exceeds the planned count number, and as a result, the counting process is performed according to the planned count number. Note that, compared to the example of FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the game medal number at the start of the operation example is less (4), and that although the game value is subtracted in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, the game value is added in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 thereafter. In this example, too, the subtraction of the gaming value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132 and the addition of the gaming value in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 are performed first, since they are performed after the operation of the counting button 171.

In the example of FIG. 123, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 123 shows that the number of game medals and the display thereof are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 1 to become 49), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the execution interval of the counting process. If no operation is performed, counting processing for the operation of the counting button 171 will be performed. Note that, compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the MAX bet button 132 is not operated.

In the example of FIG. 124, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the second short press operation of the count button 171 is performed, and 1 is added to the number of sheets to be counted, thereby indicating that 2 is set. . At this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed. FIG. 124 shows that the number of game medals and their display are not updated immediately after the counting buttons 171 are operated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 2 to become 48), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the execution interval of the counting process. If no operation is performed, counting processing for the operation of the counting button 171 will be performed. Note that, compared with the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the short press operation of the counting button 171 is performed not once but twice, and that the MAX bet button 132 is not operated.

In the example of FIG. 125, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 1, and the same value is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 125 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the scheduled number of tokens to be counted, the counted number (based on the scheduled number of tokens to be counted) is sent to the rental machine 700, and the number of game medals is updated (1 is subtracted from 1 to 0). ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between execution of the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be carried out in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (1) and that the MAX BET button 132 has not been operated.

In the example of FIG. 126, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, the counting button 171 is briefly pressed and 1 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the second and third short press operations of the count button 171 are performed, and 1 is added twice to the number of sheets to be counted, setting 3. It is shown. At this point, the timing for transmitting and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so the count notification is not performed. FIG. 126 shows that the number of game medals and their display are not updated immediately after the counting buttons 171 are operated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 3 to become 0), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As mentioned above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the execution interval of the counting process. If no operation is performed, counting processing for the operation of the counting button 171 will be performed. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is smaller (3), and the short press operation of the counting button 171 is performed three times instead of once. The difference is that the MAX bet button 132 is not operated.

In the example of FIG. 127, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, it is determined that the count button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 127 shows that the number of game medals and their display have not been updated when the planned number of medals to be counted is set.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 50 is less than the planned count number of 4, which is the number of game medals. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the number of game medals, 4, is set as the count number, and the counting process for this is executed to update the number of game medals (4 is subtracted to 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (4), the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of a short time, and the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed.

In the example of FIG. 128, the state after the count notification is transmitted and received is that the number of game medals is 30, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 128 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated when this planned count number is set.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 50 is less than the number of game medals, which is 30. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the number of game medals, 30, is set as the count number, and the counting process for this is executed to update the number of game medals (30 is subtracted from 30 to become 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound C in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the processing interval (time) for the MAX bet button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly faster than the execution interval of the counting process. If no operation is performed, counting processing for the operation of the counting button 171 will be performed. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is smaller (30), and the count button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of for a short time. , except that the MAX bet button 132 is not operated.

In the example of FIG. 129, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 100, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is determined that the count button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 129 shows that the number of game medals and their display have not been updated at the time of setting the planned number of medals to be counted.

After that, when the transmission timing of the counting notification arrives, counting processing is executed according to the number of tokens scheduled to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of tokens scheduled to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of gaming medals is updated (50 is subtracted from 100 to 500 tokens). ), the scheduled number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command including information on this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is higher (100), the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of a short time, and the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed.

In the example of FIG. 130, the number of game medals is 100 after the count notification has been sent and received, and the same value is displayed on the number of game medal display device 170.

From this state, it is determined that the count button 171 has been pressed for a long time, and 50 is set as the number of sheets to be counted. The count notification based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for a communication cycle. Therefore, no counting notification will be made at this point. FIG. 130 shows that the number of game medals and their display have not been updated when the planned number of medals to be counted is set.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (100 minus 50 to become 50), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

Furthermore, suppose that the count button 171 is pressed briefly before the communication cycle for the next count notification. Figure 130 shows that the planned count number is set to 1 by operating the count button 171 before the next game information notification. The count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of medals is updated (50 minus 1 to become 49), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound A in this case) is output. Note that in the example of Figure 130, counting sound D output in response to the previous counting process is continuing at this point, indicating that counting sound D and counting sound A overlap.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between execution of the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Compared to the example in FIG. 105, the differences are that the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is higher (100), the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of a short time, the counting button 171 is pressed for a short time after the first counting process is completed, and the MAX BET button 132 is not operated throughout these operations.

[Regarding the timing of sending and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (2)]
Hereinafter, a configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and corresponding processing (1)] will be described.

The medal count control unit 350 is configured to update the display of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the count button 171, and to update the display of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132.

In the above operation example, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the count button 171 is operated, the display update of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 may be executed before the display update of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the count button 171 (for example, Figures 105 to 111).

The operation of the counting button 171 is a counting operation to perform a process (counting) to store the game value (number of game medals) in an external device (for example, a card inserted in the lending machine 700), and is assumed to occur when the player stops playing or when a part of the accumulated game value (number of game medals) is counted. On the other hand, the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is an insertion operation to set the game value required for the game, and is an operation by the player to play the game. If an insertion operation is performed after a counting operation, since the latter insertion operation is an operation for playing the game, the display update of the game value related to the insertion can be performed first to inform the player that the insertion operation was valid. In addition, by performing the display update of the insertion operation first, the player can be made aware of the game value that can be counted (held by the player). Note that even if a person who does not intend to play intentionally performs an insertion operation after a counting operation (misoperation, prank, etc.), the display update based on the insertion operation may be performed first.

In addition, in the above example, when the loading operation is performed after the counting operation and the display is updated based on the loading operation first, the communication cycle of the information for the counting operation (count notification) is longer than the communication cycle of the information for the loading operation. Although a long configuration is used, the configuration is not limited to a configuration related to communication cycles. For example, when an inserting operation is performed after a counting operation, if the medal number control unit 350 receives information based on the inserting operation before transmitting information based on the counting operation to the external device (lending machine 700), It may be configured such that the display of the gaming value corresponding to the input operation is updated before the display of the gaming value corresponding to the operation is updated. Also, for example, the time it takes from the counting operation to the completion of the counting process may be longer than the time from the loading operation to the completion of the loading process, and the loading operation may be performed after the counting operation. In this case, the display of the gaming value corresponding to the input operation may be updated before the display of the gaming value corresponding to the counting operation is updated. Further, for example, for a charging operation performed within a predetermined time after a counting operation, the display for this charging operation may be updated first. Note that when a configuration is used in which the communication cycle of information for counting operations (count notification) is longer than the communication cycle for information for inputting operations, as in the above example, the loading process can be executed smoothly.

In addition, in the above example, the configuration for updating the display according to the number of sheets counted and the inserting operation was explained, but for example, pachinko machines also have configurations that correspond to the above operations such as counting operations and firing operations, and the present invention can also be applied to such gaming machines. be able to.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (3)]
The following describes the configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing (1)].

The medal number control unit 350 is configured to perform a counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171 and to execute a placing process based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132.

In the above operation example, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated after the counting button 171 is operated, the input process based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132 is executed before the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171, and as a result of this input process, the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171 may not be executed (for example, Figures 113 and 115).

Operation of the counting button 171 is a counting operation to perform a process (counting) to store the game value (number of game medals) in an external device (for example, a card inserted into the lending machine 700), and is expected to occur when the player stops playing or when a portion of the accumulated game value (number of game medals) is to be counted. On the other hand, operation of the MAX BET button 132 is an insertion operation to set the game value required for playing, and is an operation by the player to play. If an insertion operation is performed after a counting operation, since the later insertion operation is an operation to play the game, it may be possible to prioritize the player's desire to play by providing a case where the insertion process is performed without executing the counting process.

In the above example, when a slotting operation is performed after a counting operation, the counting process is not executed because the number of game medals falls below the planned number to be counted due to the slotting process performed before the counting process. However, this is not the only possible configuration for executing the slotting process but not the counting process when a slotting operation is performed after a counting operation. For example, when a slotting operation is performed after a counting operation and the slotting process is performed before the counting process, the counting process may not be executed regardless of the value of the number of game medals.

In the above example, it was explained that when an insert operation is performed after a counting operation, the counting process may not be executed because the insert process is performed before the counting process. As a configuration in which the insert operation is performed before the counting process when the insert operation is performed after the counting operation, a configuration in which the communication cycle of the information for the counting operation (counting notification) is longer than the communication cycle of the information for the insert operation is used, but the configuration is not limited to the communication cycle. For example, when an insert operation is performed after a counting operation, if the medal count control unit 350 receives information based on the insert operation before transmitting information based on the counting operation to the external device (rental machine 700), the insert process may be performed before the counting process. For example, the time required from the counting operation to the completion of the counting process may be longer than the time required from the insert operation to the completion of the insert process, and the insert process may be performed before the counting process when the insert operation is performed after the counting operation. For example, for an insert operation performed within a predetermined time after the counting operation, the insert process corresponding to this insert operation may be performed before the counting process, and the counting process scheduled at this time may be canceled.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the counting process is not executed if the number of game values is insufficient at the stage of transmission to the external device. However, if the counting process were executed, the game value would be improperly given to the player. For this reason, by configuring in such a way that the counting process is not executed as in the above example, the game value can be managed appropriately.

The medal count control unit 350 is configured to execute the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button 134.

In the above operation example, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the counting button 171 is operated, the insertion process based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is executed before the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171, and as a result of this insertion process, the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171 is not executed, or the counting process is executed for fewer gaming media than the number planned to be counted (for example, Figures 113, 115, and 116). Furthermore, a case has been described in which the counting process is executed even in cases where the counting process would not have been executed without the operation of the settlement button 134 by executing a settlement operation (Figures 121 and 122).

Operation of the settlement button 134 is a settlement operation that performs a process (settlement) to return the game value set (bet) for use in the game to the stored game value (number of game medals), and is assumed to be a case in which the player stops playing. When performing an insertion operation after a counting operation, even if the counting process is not executed because the number of game medals falls below the planned number of medals due to the insertion process performed before the counting process, the settlement operation from that point is an operation to stop playing, so by executing the settlement process by this settlement operation, the counting process is executed as if the insertion process had not been executed, and the player's intention may be prioritized. Note that if the timing of operation of the settlement button 134 is after the timing of execution of the counting process in response to the operation of the counting button 171, the counting process will not be executed due to the insertion process (or the counting process will be executed for fewer game media than the planned number of medals), and the settlement process by the settlement button 134 will be executed after that.

In the above example, the settlement button 134 processes all of the medals that have been bet, but it may be configured such that, for example, one operation of the settlement button 134 settles one medal that has been bet.

In the above example, we have explained the configuration according to the number of counted coins and the insertion operation, but for example, pachinko machines also have configurations that correspond to the above operations, such as counting operations and firing operations, and the present invention can also be applied to such gaming machines.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (4)]
The following describes the configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing (1)].

When the count button 171 is operated, the medal count control unit 350 executes the counting process, and the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to output a counting sound in response to this.

In the above operation example, the same counting sound may be output even if the counting button 171 is operated differently (FIG. 104, FIG. 123 to FIG. 130). With this configuration, by making the counting sound common, it becomes easier to understand whether or not counting processing is being executed. Note that although the above operation example describes the counting sound, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the output of a notification means related to counting, such as a display or a lamp, is not limited to the sound and is made common to different operations. .

In the above example, there is a communication cycle for information (counting notification) for the counting operation, and information for multiple counting operations during this cycle may be sent in one counting notification (for example, Figures 124 and 126). However, the configuration for outputting the same counting sound for different counting operations is not limited to the configuration related to the communication cycle. For example, if the medal count control unit 350 receives information based on another counting operation before transmitting information based on the counting operation to the external device (rental machine 700) after a counting operation, the configuration may be such that information corresponding to the previous counting operation and the other counting operation is transmitted to the external device. Also, for example, if the first sub-control unit 400 receives new information for a counting operation while it is outputting a counting sound, the counting sound may not be output for the new counting sound depending on this information.

In the above example, counting sounds A to D (Figure 104) were used as the counting sounds, but the above configuration may include not only these counting sounds but also the counting completion sound. For example, even if the counting button 171 is operated differently, the sound (counting sound + counting completion sound) output at that time may be the same.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (5)]
The following describes the configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing (1)].

When the counting button 171 is operated, the medal number control section 350 executes a counting process, and in conjunction with this, the first sub-control section 400 is configured to output a counting sound.

Here, in the above operation example, different counting sounds may be output even if the operation on the counting button 171 is the same (FIG. 104, FIG. 123 to FIG. 130). With this configuration, it may be possible to output a counting sound commensurate with the game value after counting or the counted value. Note that although the above operation example describes the counting sound, it is not limited to the sound, and the notification means may be configured to output different outputs for the same counting operation, such as a display or a lamp, for example.

In the above example, a configuration is adopted in which the counting sound is different depending on whether the number of game medals of the medal number control unit 350 is 0 or not (steps S5A05 and S5A08 in FIG. 103). However, the threshold values and reference values for differentiating the counting sounds are not limited to these values. Further, the value used as the determination criterion is not limited to the number of game medals, but may also be an advantageous period (number of AT remaining games), or may be different depending on the state of the game rather than the value.

In the above example, counting sounds A to D (Figure 104) were used as the counting sounds, but the above configuration may include not only these counting sounds but also the counting completion sound. For example, even if the operation on the counting button 171 is the same, the sounds output at that time (counting sounds + counting completion sound) may be different.

<others>
In this embodiment, a slot machine 100 in which medals (coins) are used as a gaming medium is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to slot machines in which gaming balls (e.g., pachinko balls) are used as a gaming medium, pachinko machines, arrange ball gaming machines, janball gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

Note that a slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and the game medium is input by inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

≪Correspondence between structure of the invention and embodiments≫
Hereinafter, the configuration of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The gaming control means is a means that, when an operation is performed on the input operation means between the transmission of the input operation information to the gaming value number control means and the reception of the response information, does not transmit the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on the operation (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received, see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation means includes a first input operation means (e.g., a 1-coin bet button 130) and a second input operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132) different from the first input operation means,
The game control means includes:
transmits first input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting input of one coin) to the game value number control means as the input operation information based on an operation performed on the first input operation means;
a means for transmitting second input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting the number of input coins to be three) different from the first input operation information as the input operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the second input operation means;
The game value number control means
Based on the reception of the first insertion operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals for one requested insertion medal) is performed as the game value update process;
a means for performing a second game value update process (e.g., subtracting the number of game medals from the number of medals required to be inserted, 3 medals) different from the first game value update process as the game value update process based on reception of the second input operation information;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number is the maximum bet number or the number of game medals is 0).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the response information is received within a predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the production control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 17). ),
The means outputs the predetermined game information to the performance control means even if the response information is not received during the elapse of the predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 17, if the response command is not received, the response command is considered abnormal and step S1114 is executed).
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (description of [operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)] reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The gaming control means is a means that, when an operation is performed on the input operation means between the transmission of the input operation information to the gaming value number control means and the reception of the response information, does not transmit the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on the operation (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received, see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means
transmitting first response information (e.g., other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when a input command is received]);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is
In the counting process, the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34);
In the counting process, when the number of game values is stored in the transmission buffer and the input operation information is received while the game value update process is being performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for storing a part of the game value numbers stored in the game value number storage means in the transmission buffer in one of the counting processes, and for subtracting the part of the game value numbers from the game value numbers (for example, since the maximum number of counted medals in one count is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 40), the part of the game value numbers may become a part of the game medal number).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the gaming value number control means receives the input operation information between the end of one counting process and the start of the next counting process, the gaming value number control means receives the first response information. to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than a re-request),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when the second response information is received (for example, a judgment of No in step S1310 of FIG. 19 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for not performing the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, a judgment of No in step S1306 in FIG. 19) and invalidating the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, the response result is abnormal, so step S1113 in FIG. 17 is not executed),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, if the current number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on receipt of the first response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 19 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the game media management device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 to 57, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55);
If the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 55, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation means includes a maximum number input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132),
the game control means is a means capable of transmitting maximum number insertion operation information (e.g., an insertion command with the maximum bet number as the required number) which is the insertion operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the maximum number insertion operation means;
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of game value requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information (see [Modification for Input Operation]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information indicating that the input number limit flag is on).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means and the input operation information includes the predetermined information, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in Figure 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information, the input operation information executes the game value update process to set the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means to 0, and may transmit the response information including information indicating the number of game values before it became 0 to the game control means (for example, the modified example of FIG. 55 to FIG. 57, No is determined in step S4604 of FIG. 57, Yes is determined in S4621, the number of game medals is all subtracted (becomes 0), and the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including information indicating the number of play values before becoming 0 is received, the processing unit 100 performs an input process of inputting the number of play values (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
As the insertion operation means, there is a minimum number insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means converts the minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested number of coins of 1), which is the insertion operation information, into the game value based on the operation performed on the minimum number insertion operation means. means capable of transmitting to a number control means;
The number of game values control means is a means for deriving the minimum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs based on the reception of the minimum number input operation information,
The minimum number insertion operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 55);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 19 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 to 57, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The means may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55);
If the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 55, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 to 57, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The means may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55);
If the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 55, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (e.g., payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, the method shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting process and the second counting process are executed consecutively in accordance with the communication cycle;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the gaming value number control means controls the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information and the game value number storage. The means may total the number of game values stored in the means and subject it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 46 );
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 19 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game media management device.
The game value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, and, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process which is the counting process is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on a payout being made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a payout command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting process and the second counting process are executed consecutively in accordance with the communication cycle;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may, when receiving the payout information during the execution of the first counting process, sum up the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and subject the sum to the second counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The apparatus includes a performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 of FIG. 50 );
The gaming control means outputs predetermined gaming information to the performance control means based on receiving the response information indicating that the gaming value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been normally completed (for example, step S1607 in FIG. 22 ),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the game media management device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next and subsequent counting processes). ,
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on a payout being made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a payout command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. A means capable of performing processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 39);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a second value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of payouts to (for example, Yes determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the second value, the number of game value control means controls the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50),
The second value is a value larger than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 50, step S4107 in FIG. 39),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means stores the response information in the transmission buffer, and transmits the response information. After the transmission buffer is cleared with the transmission of the number to the external processing device, it is possible to execute the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the number of game value control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , Yes determination in step S3703 of FIG. 36, step S3706), means for transmitting the response information including first information (for example, the loan serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the first value, the number of game values control means (without updating the communication number with the external processing device) For example, if the determination in step S3703 in FIG. Loan receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 39 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, see the judgment of No in step S4107 of FIG. 39, [Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the number of game value controllers control the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 39);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. A means capable of performing processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer that temporarily stores the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is a means for storing the gaming value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and also performing the gaming value updating process (for example, the gaming value number control means in FIG. 34 Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is capable of executing the game value update process of updating a communication number with the external processing device (e.g., judging Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 39 , step S3706) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, transmitting the response information including first information (e.g., the currently received rental number) to the external processing device (e.g., step S3714 of FIG. 36 ) and adding the rental number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means,
When the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, a judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39), the game value number control means transmits the response information including second information (for example, the previously received rental serial number) to the external processing device without updating the communication number with the external processing device (for example, a judgment of No in step S3703 in FIG. 36, step S3706 is not executed), and maintains the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of No in step S3712 in FIG. 36, step S3714 is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game media management device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35 );
the game value number control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game media management device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the game media management device, executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 36 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 63).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored (for example, FIG. 68(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for not transmitting the gaming value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 40, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms),
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The second value may increase in accordance with the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state and maximizing the degree of increase when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored (FIG. 68(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value. is means for reducing the degree of increase in the second value compared to the case where the second value exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 68(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 59) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 59 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the gaming value number to the external processing device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 59, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the automatic counting state is set, a notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) is provided to give a predetermined notification (FIGS. 71 and 72).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted as the number of gaming values to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the automatic counting state when a power outage occurs while the automatic counting state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state when power is restored thereafter (for example, FIG. 70(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for not setting the automatic counting state when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 70(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means entered a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values;
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 59) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 59 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the game value number to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 59, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 59) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 59 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the game value number to the external processing device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 59, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 73(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in the predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms),
The game value number control means is a means for determining the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored, regardless of the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state before the power is restored, when a power outage occurs and the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since the power is restored thereafter (FIG. 73(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step 40 in FIG. 40). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The game value number control means is a means that can set the counting promotion state when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after a power outage occurs and the power is restored. 73(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 63).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 73(a)),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 73(a)).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. (for example, FIGS. 76 to 80),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process is executed at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 300 ms),
The display means is a means for performing the change display in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 76 and 77).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation performed on the operation means,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period as the gaming value number,
The game value number control means is a means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is eliminated after the counting promotion state is set (for example, determining No in step S4211 of FIG. 40, clearing the number of coins to be counted),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 76 to FIG. 80 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, the number of game medal display device 170, the effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. (for example, FIGS. 76 to 80),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 15 ),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28 );
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 28 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the gaming control means at a predetermined period (for example, transmitting one command with 8 interruptions (0.745 ms x 8)),
The game control means is means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, in FIG. Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operations for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means may execute a process corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, determining No in step S3007 of FIG. 28 or step S4407 of FIG. 42, or initializing chip information).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 15 ),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28 );
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 28 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 15 ),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28 );
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 28 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is reported in priority to an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 24),
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means may execute a process corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, determining No in step S3007 of FIG. 28 or step S4407 of FIG. 42, or initializing chip information).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when the predetermined information is received (for example, the determination in step S1606 of FIG. 22 is No and the process is repeated [operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34);
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A gaming value number control means (e.g., , medal number control unit 350),
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the rental information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur when lending beyond the upper limit).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a demo presentation when a game is not being played,
The predetermined effect is an effect that is performed even when the demo effect is being performed (for example, FIG. 84(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming media management device and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit; ,
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur when lending beyond the upper limit).
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by performing two-way communication with the external processing device;
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the presentation performed by the presentation means (e.g., the presentation image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
the game value number control means is means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the rental information;
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 81, when the “number of game medals” exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., a rental machine 700, a host server) and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to game values used in a game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The main control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality occurs with the external processing device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 16 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) is provided that is in one-way communication with the main control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The performance control means is a means for not notifying the performance means of the communication abnormality when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, not executing an error notification for a VL signal abnormality),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The main control means executes a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. is a possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the gaming medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to game values used in a game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game media management device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the game media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 16 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to game values used in a game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The main control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality occurs with the external processing device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 16 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation of the counting operation means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) in which an auxiliary function advantageous to a player can be activated,
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state;
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a counting performance (e.g., FIG. 63) in association with the counting process,
The increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first game state when the game is played according to the activated auxiliary function is smaller than the decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process (see the configuration in [Regarding the configuration related to the difference between payout and counting process] where the increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to the counting process).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The counting performance is a performance in which a termination condition different from the termination of the counting process is set (see the configuration in [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting process] in which the counting performance may be terminated even while the counting process is continuing).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the specific performance while the counting performance is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which a performance that requires some kind of operation is not performed in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The specific performance is a performance that requires an operation from the player;
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which a performance that requires some kind of operation is not performed in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The counting effect is an effect whose content changes depending on the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting processing, in which the content of the counting presentation changes depending on the number of gaming medals counted).

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for restarting the immediately preceding counting performance from the middle when a new counting process is started within a predetermined time after the counting process is terminated halfway due to the completion of the counting process. is,
A gaming machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), even after the counting performance ends midway, the immediately preceding counting performance (counting performance that ended midway) ) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for continuing the counting performance for a predetermined time after the counting process is completed, and for continuing to execute the counting performance when a new counting process is started while the counting performance is continuing.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description in [Regarding the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting process], in which the counting performance continues even after the counting process is completed, and when a new counting process is started, the ongoing counting performance is maintained as is).

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information regarding settlement (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means;
the game value number control means is means for deriving a settlement number of the game value based on reception of the first information, performing the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then not transmitting response information to the first information to the game control means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting the bet amount to 0 based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a settlement command (no response command used)).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game control means is a means for transmitting second information regarding insertion (e.g., an insertion command) to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means;
the game value number control means is means capable of deriving a requested number of game values based on reception of the second information, performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values, and then transmitting response information to the second information to the game control means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting the bet amount based on reception of response information to the second information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that is characterized by the above-mentioned (for input commands, see the configuration using response commands).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the game value number excluding the increased game value number to the external processing device when the game value number is increased while the counting process is continuing, and then transmitting the increased game value number to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. , and then transmits the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described, which is characterized by being connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device after transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the gaming value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at periodically visited transmission timings (for example, transmitting the number of gaming medals by counting process (count notification). ) is every 300ms, Figure 5),
When the gaming value number control means ends the transmission of the gaming value number excluding the increased number of gaming values at the current transmission timing of the transmission timing, the control means controls the number of gaming values at the next transmission timing of the transmission timing. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of game values at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 91(c) and 91(e), after the transmission of 120 game medals during the counting process is first completed, the increased number of game values is transmitted at the transmission timing. will be sent),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the gaming value number while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the gaming value number becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
the display means is a means capable of executing a subtraction display for subtracting the gaming value number in accordance with the gaming value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting an increase in the number of game values when the number of game values increases while the counting process is continuing (FIG. 91(d)(f)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the number of gaming values becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on a payout being made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either payout or settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The input operation means includes a predetermined input operation means (e.g., a bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount,
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means,
the game control means is a means capable of setting the minimum value to the bet amount based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means in a state in which a value different from the minimum value is set to the bet amount, and capable of transmitting information on a difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the settlement information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the settlement information including a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value to the game value number control means, based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means when the bet amount is set to the maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
the sound output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means,
the sound output means is means for outputting a insertion sound based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the insertion sound based on an operation to the predetermined insertion operation means in a state where the bet amount is set to a maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see the description under [Regarding setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button]) that is characterized by the above.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment information to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is means that does not output the settlement sound when the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the bet number is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the gaming value number;
A game machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Also,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
A game machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of game values acquired in the game stored (for example, the number of medals held is the number of game values acquired in the game stored),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for executing a first performance when the determination target has not reached a predetermined number, and for executing a second performance when the determination target has reached the predetermined number (see the configuration for executing different performances depending on the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding performances according to the number of game medals]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing display of information regarding the judgment target at least in the certain game state (see the configuration for displaying the value to be judged in the description of [Presentation according to the number of game medals]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, an effect according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (see the configuration in which an effect using the number of held medals and an effect using the number of acquired medals are executed in parallel in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the above-mentioned certain gaming state, there is a case where the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state exceeds the number included in the above-mentioned external information. If the counting process is not carried out under favorable conditions, the number of medals earned may exceed the number of medals held).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a setting suggestion performance according to the determination target ("When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number," in [About the performance according to the number of game medals]) ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The performance control means is a means that can display the number of game values in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possession" in FIG. 93),
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance in the certain gaming state according to the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state.
A game machine characterized by this (in the description of [Regarding performance according to the number of game medals], a configuration in which the number of acquired medals in the AT state is the subject of determination, see FIG. 93) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing the display of the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (for example, the value of "...GET" in FIG. 93),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for updating and displaying both the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of game values when game values are acquired in the certain game state (for example, FIG. 93 (d2) (d3)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a performance according to the number of game values in the certain gaming state (during the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], it is possible to execute performances in parallel). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error relating to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes unresolvable.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Operation when errors are repeated], FIG. 96).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (see FIG. 94),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94).
a means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 96 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the operation when an error occurs multiple times, in which the error clearing operation means for clearing a game control error and a medal count control error is the same configuration).

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described, which is characterized by being connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error relating to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes an unresolvable first state;
the notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Operation when errors are repeated], FIG. 96).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a notification to prompt the user to release the first error based on the operation of the second operating means in the first state (see FIG. 96 (d4)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a second error notification regarding the second error (see FIG. 96(d2));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for interrupting the second error notification being executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see (d2) and (d3) of FIG. 96 ),
The notification means is a means for starting notification of the second error when the first state ends by releasing the first error (see (d4) to (d6) of FIG. 96 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (see the configuration for displaying messages regarding both errors in the description of [Regarding the operation when errors overlap]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means,
A gaming machine (see FIGS. 94(b2) to (b4)) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94).
a means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 96 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) that is advantageous to a player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in an AT state) in the first gaming state,
The sound output means may reduce the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed in the first gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]) that is characterized by the above.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reel based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is a means for reducing the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels are stopped in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)] in which counting notification A is executed when all reels are stopped).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means for reducing the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since all of the stop operations for the reels being rotated have been performed in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)], in which counting notification A is executed on the condition that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last stopping operation on the reels and all of the reels have stopped spinning).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means being capable of outputting a second sound effect (e.g., a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The audio output means is a means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound is decreased.
There is described a game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which the counting notification A that is being executed is terminated when an operation on some operating means is triggered in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reel based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
A performance means including the audio output means (for example, a performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
Equipped with
the game control means is means for setting a second game state (e.g., a normal state) that is more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state;
The presentation means is a means capable of executing a demonstration presentation,
the effect means is means for not executing a demo effect when all of the reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The presentation means is a means for executing a demo presentation when all of the reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description in [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)] that a so-called demo performance is not executed when the player is in an advantageous state, and a demo performance is executed when the player is in an unfavorable state).

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described, which is characterized by being connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in the AT state) in the first gaming state,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a second effect sound (for example, a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The audio output means is a means that may maintain a state in which the first performance sound is output when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A game machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)]) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels in the first gaming state are stopped;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)] in which counting notification B is executed when all reels are stopped).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for not outputting the second sound effect when any of the plurality of reels is spinning in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], in which counting notification B is not executed while any of the reels are spinning).

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second performance sound from the time the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second performance sound in a first mode when the counting process is executed while all the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. This is a method that may be used in some cases.
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a second manner when the counting process is being executed in a state in which any one of the plurality of reels is spinning in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The voice output means is configured to output the sound output means when the counting process is executed between when the predetermined operation means is operated and when the plurality of reels start rotating in the first gaming state. means for outputting the performance sound in a second mode,
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) containing information on the number of game values received from the number of game value control means to the production control means,
The performance control means is means for executing first control regarding the number of gaming values based on receiving the command;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The performance control means is a means that does not execute the first control even if it receives the command until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The command includes information indicating whether or not communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until the performance control means receives information indicating that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Display and presentation based on information from the medal count control unit]).

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for executing the first control based on the communication between the game control means and the game value number control means being normal;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the production control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is sent at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, the various processing commands in FIG. 5) including the information on the number of game values received from the game value number control means to the production control means in accordance with the progress of the game. It is a means to
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on receiving the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first operation means (for example, counting button 171);
a second operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132);
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A game value number control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number display means (for example, a gaming medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the number of gaming values managed by the gaming value number control means;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number display means is a means capable of updating the display of the gaming value number (hereinafter referred to as "first display update") in response to the operation of the first operating means,
The gaming value number display means is a means capable of updating the display of the gaming value number (hereinafter referred to as "second display update") in response to the operation of the second operating means,
When the second operation means is operated after the first operation means is operated, the first display update may be executed after the second display update is executed ( [Refer to the explanation in [Regarding the timing of sending and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (2)]])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number display means is a means electrically connected to the game value number control means,
the first operation means is a means electrically connected to the game value number control means,
the game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting a game value number to an external device in response to an operation of the first operation means;
the second operation means is a means electrically connected to the game control means,
the game value number control means is a means capable of receiving a game value number transmitted from the game control means in response to an operation of the second operation means;
When the second operation means is operated after the first operation means is operated, if the game value number control means receives the game value number transmitted from the game control means in response to the operation of the second operation means before the game value number is transmitted to the external device in response to the operation of the first operation means, the first display update is executed after the second display update is executed (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding processing (2)]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for accumulating game value numbers corresponding to a plurality of operations of the first operation means and transmitting the accumulated game value numbers to the external device (see, for example, operation examples of FIGS. 107 and 109 );
the game value number display means is means for executing the first display update when game value numbers corresponding to a plurality of operations of the first operating means are accumulated and transmitted to the external device;
The game value number display means is a means for executing the second display update based on the game value number received when the game value number control means receives the game value number transmitted from the game control means in response to the operation of the second operation means (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding processing (2)]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second operation means is operated after the first operation means is operated, the game value number control means transmits a game value number to the external device in response to the operation of the first operation means, and then receives a game value number transmitted from the game control means based on the operation of the second operation means, the game value number display means executes the first display update and then executes the second display update (for example, see the operation example of FIG. 112 );
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277) capable of outputting a first sound (for example, a counting sound) in response to the operation of the first operation means;
The sound output means is a means for outputting the first sound after the first display update starts in response to the operation of the first operation means (for example, see the operation example in FIG. 105);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means is a means for communicating with the external device at a predetermined timing that periodically occurs,
When the operation state of the first operation means crosses the predetermined timing (for example, when the counting button 171 is pressed and held), and the second operation means is operated between the end of the operation state and the arrival of the next predetermined timing, the first display update is executed after the second display update is executed (for example, see the operation example of FIG. 110 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, even if the first display update takes a long time, the second display update is executed first, so the player will not feel distrustful because the second display update is not executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
A second operating means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) capable of executing control regarding the progress of a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to game values used in a game;
A gaming machine equipped with
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing a game value number counting process in response to an operation of the first operation means,
the game value control means is a means capable of executing a game value input process in response to an operation of the second operation means;
When the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated, the insertion process corresponding to the operation of the second operating means may be executed, and the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operating means may not be executed (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding process (3)]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means is means having a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) capable of storing the number of game values,
The first operation means is means electrically connected to the game value number control means,
The counting process is a process of transmitting the number of gaming values to an external device in response to the operation of the first operating means, and subtracting the transmitted number of gaming values from the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming value storage means. and
The second operation means is means electrically connected to the game control means,
The input process includes receiving the number of game values transmitted from the game control means in response to the operation of the second operation means, and converting the received number of game values into the game value stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a process of subtracting from a number,
When the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated, the second operation is performed before the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operating means is executed. The input process is executed in accordance with the operation of the means, and after the execution of the input process, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is smaller than the number of game values scheduled to be processed by the counting process. In this case, the counting process is not executed (see explanation of [Regarding operation information transmission/reception timing and corresponding processing (3)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number control means is means for setting a game value number to be processed by the counting process in response to an operation of the first operation means;
When the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process, the number of game values to be processed is cleared and the counting process is not executed (for example, see operation examples of Figures 113 and 115).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operation means (for example, payment button 134),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of executing a processing of settling the number of gaming values in accordance with the operation of the third operating means,
The third operation means is means electrically connected to the game control means,
The payment process includes receiving the number of game values transmitted from the game control means in response to the operation of the third operation means, and converting the received number of game values into the game value stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a process of adding to a number,
When the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated and the third operating means is further operated, the counting process according to the operation of the first operating means. Before the inputting process is executed, the inputting process according to the operation of the second operating means is executed, and after the execution of the inputting process, the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming value storage means is calculated by the counting process. Even if the number of game values to be processed is less than the number of game values to be processed, the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means after the payment processing according to the operation of the third operating means is executed is the number of game values to be counted. The counting process may be executed when the number of game values that are scheduled to be processed by the process is exceeded (for example, see the operation examples in FIGS. 121 and 122).
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Before the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operating means is executed, the inputting process according to the operation of the second operating means is executed, and after the execution of the inputting process, the number of game values is stored. In a state where the number of gaming values stored in the means is smaller than the number of gaming values scheduled to be processed by the counting process, the counting process according to the operation of the first operating means is not executed;
If the third operation means is operated after that, the number of game values may be settled in accordance with the operation of the third operation means ([corresponding to the timing of sending and receiving operation information] Regarding processing (3)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
and a game value number display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number managed by the game value number control means.
The game value number display means is a means capable of updating the display of the game value number in response to an operation of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as a "first display update");
The game value number display means is a means for not executing the first display update in a state in which the insertion process in response to the operation of the second operation means is executed before the counting process in response to the operation of the first operation means is executed, and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means after the insertion process is executed is less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process (see, for example, operation examples of Figures 113 and 115 ),
The game value number display means is a means for executing the first display update when the insertion process in response to the operation of the second operation means is executed before the counting process in response to the operation of the first operation means is executed, and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means becomes less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process after the insertion process is executed, and further, the settlement process in response to the operation of the third operation means is executed and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means becomes equal to or greater than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process (see, for example, operation examples in Figures 121 and 122).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Predetermined operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A game value number control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
Sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277),
A game machine comprising:
The number of game values control means is a means capable of transmitting the number of game values to an external device in response to the operation of the predetermined operation means,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first counting sound when a first operation (for example, a short press operation) is performed on the predetermined operation means,
The sound output means may output the first counting sound once when a second operation different from the first operation (for example, a long press operation) is performed on the predetermined operation means. It is a certain means (see explanation of [Regarding the timing of sending and receiving operation information and corresponding processing (4)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operation is operating the predetermined operation means a first number of times (for example, once),
The second operation is operating the predetermined operation means a second number of times (for example, 2 to 5 times) that is greater than the first number of times,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting the first counting sound when the number of game values corresponding to the first operation on the predetermined operation means is transmitted to the external device,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting the first counting sound once when the number of game values corresponding to the second operation on the predetermined operation means is transmitted to the external device (for example, , see FIG. 104(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

When a predetermined operation means is operated continuously, there is a limit to the game value that can be counted. In the game machine described above, it is possible to prevent the counting sound from being overemphasized by not outputting the counting sound excessively when a small number of game values are counted.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
and a game value number display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number managed by the game value number control means.
When the number of game values corresponding to the second operation on the predetermined operation means is transmitted to the external device, the output period of the first counting sound is longer than the period required for updating the display of the number of game values (for example, the display update of the game medal count display device 170 is performed at a time corresponding to the transmission interval of 0.745 ms of the medal count control unit 350, while the counting sound is at least 250 ms (in the case of counting sound A)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When outputting the counting sound, if the first counting sound is output for each operation of the predetermined operating means, the first counting sound will be output as many times as the number of operations of the predetermined operating means. Depending on the length of the first counting sound, there is a possibility that the counting sound continues to be output even though the display update of the game value number display means has finished. The game machine described above has a configuration in which the above problem does not occur by outputting the first counting sound once even if the predetermined operating means is operated the second number of times which is greater than the first number of times. By further lengthening the output period of the first counting sound, it is possible to make it easier to understand the execution of the counting process.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined operation means is means electrically connected to the game value number control means,
A communication cycle between the game value number control means and the external device is a first cycle (for example, 300 ms),
The number of game values control means controls the number of game values set according to the operation of the predetermined operation means between the end of communication with the external device and the next communication to the number of game values set in the next communication. is a means of transmitting to an external device,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, the gaming value number set in response to the operation of the specified operating means is transmitted in a lump sum for each first cycle. In this configuration, the number of transmissions is smaller than the number of operations of the specified operating means, and the counting sound can be prevented from being output excessively.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means is means having a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) capable of storing the number of game values,
The gaming value number control means is capable of executing a process of subtracting the gaming value number transmitted to the external device from the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means in response to the operation of the predetermined operating means. is a means,
The first operation is an operation in which the operation time of the predetermined operation means is shorter than the first time (for example, a short press operation),
The second operation is an operation in which the operation time of the predetermined operation means is longer than the first time (for example, a long press operation),
The sound output means outputs a second sound when the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means becomes a certain value (for example, 0) due to the first operation on the predetermined operation means. A means capable of outputting a counting sound (for example, counting sound B),
The sound output means outputs the second counting sound when the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means reaches the certain value due to the second operation on the predetermined operation means. A means that can output
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above game machines, even if the game values transmitted to the external device are different, the same sound is output depending on the number of game values after transmission, so the number of game values can sometimes be grasped by sound. .

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting 1 as a game value number to the external device in response to the first operation,
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting a predetermined value greater than 1 as the number of game values to the external device in response to the second operation.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a third counting sound (for example, counting sound D) when the predetermined value is transmitted to the external device in response to the second operation,
After transmitting the predetermined value to the external device in response to the second operation, while the third counting sound is being output, the first counting sound in response to the first operation is output. may be output (for example, see Figure 130),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above game machine, by outputting the first counting sound without waiting for the output of the third counting sound to finish, there is a situation where the first counting sound is output with a significant delay with respect to the first operation. It is possible to prevent this, and to make the time from when the predetermined operating means is operated until the counting sound is outputted appropriate.

Further, the game machine described above,
The sound output means is capable of outputting counting sounds (for example, counting sounds B, C, and D) including at least a certain part (for example, the "Kinkhorn" sound in FIG. 104(a)) in response to the second operation. It is a means of
The second counting sound is a sound including the certain part,
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the number of game values is stored in the number of game values storage means in accordance with the second operation. means capable of transmitting all the game value numbers held to the external device;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

The above-mentioned gaming machine has a configuration that assumes the first operation in a state where the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means is small. For example, if one count sound is output in response to multiple first operations, it is difficult to determine whether all the game values stored in the game value storage means have been sent to the external device. It is. In the above game machine, by using part (certain part) of the sound output in response to the second operation, it is possible to make it easier to understand that all the game values have been sent to the external device. .

Also, in the above explanation,
Predetermined operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A game value number control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
Sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277),
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is means having a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) capable of storing the number of game values,
The gaming value number control means transmits the gaming value number to an external device in response to the operation of the predetermined operating means, and subtracts the transmitted gaming value number from the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means that can execute the process of
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a counting sound according to an operation on the predetermined operation means,
The sound output means outputs a sound when a certain operation is performed on the predetermined operation means and the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means becomes a certain value (for example, 0) (hereinafter referred to as "the number of game values"). (hereinafter referred to as "the second case") and a case where the certain operation on the predetermined operation means is performed and the number of gaming values stored in the gaming value number storage means does not reach the certain value (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"). ), the counting sound to be output is different (see explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and corresponding processing (5)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the certain operation includes a first operation (e.g., a short press operation) in which an operation time of the predetermined operation means is shorter than a first time, and a second operation (e.g., a long press operation) in which an operation time of the predetermined operation means is longer than the first time,
the sound output means is means for outputting a first counting sound (e.g., counting sound B) or a second counting sound (e.g., counting sound C) in the first case when the certain operation is the second operation,
the sound output means is means for outputting a third counting sound (e.g., counting sound D) in the second case when the certain operation is the second operation,
the first counting sound, the second counting sound, and the third counting sound are sounds including a first portion (e.g., a "ding-dong"sound);
The third counting sound is a sound that ends with the first portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, the counting sound for the second operation has a common first part, making it easier to know that the counting for the second operation has ended.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number of game values control means is a means capable of transmitting the maximum number of game values that can be transmitted (for example, 50) to an external device based on the second operation,
In the first case when the certain operation is the second operation, the sound output means outputs the sound when the number of gaming values transmitted to the external device in response to the second operation is a predetermined number. means for outputting the first counting sound when the count is below a value (for example, 5 or below);
In the first case when the certain operation is the second operation, the sound output means is configured to output the sound when the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the second operation is the predetermined number. means for outputting the second counting sound when the value is larger than the value of
The second counting sound and the third counting sound are sounds that include a second part (for example, a common melody),
The first counting sound is a sound that does not include the second part,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above gaming machine, if the number of game values transmitted to the external device is equal to or less than a predetermined value in the first case when the second operation is performed, the first counting sound is output. Furthermore, in the first case when the second operation is performed, if the number of gaming values transmitted to the external device is larger than a predetermined value, a second counting sound is output; In this case, the third counting sound is output. The first counting sound does not include the second part, and the second counting sound and the third counting sound include the second part, so the situation can be understood by the difference in the counting sounds.

Further, the game machine described above,
The time of the first counting sound is shorter than the time of the second counting sound,
The time of the second counting sound is shorter than the time of the third counting sound,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above game machine, the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means and the number of game values sent to the external device are determined by the difference in the time of the counting sound output when the second operation is performed. It can be made easier to understand.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting 1 as the gaming value number to an external device in response to the first operation,
The sound output means is configured to output a sound in the first case when the certain operation is the first operation, and the number of gaming values transmitted to the external device in response to the first operation is 1. means for outputting the first counting sound in a certain case (for example, see FIG. 104(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, in a first case where a first operation is performed, if the number of play values transmitted to the external device is 1, a first counting sound is output. And in a first case where a second operation is performed, if the number of play values transmitted to the external device is equal to or less than a predetermined value, a first counting sound is output. With these configurations, it is possible to make the player understand that the number of play values transmitted to the external device is small when the first counting sound is output.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the first counting sound in the first case where the certain operation is the first operation performed a plurality of times, and the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the plurality of first operations is the value of the plurality of first operations (for example, see FIG. 104(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the above game machine, in the first case where the first operation is performed a plurality of times, the first counting sound is output if the number of game values transmitted to the external device is the value of the plurality of times. With this configuration, when the first counting sound is output, it is possible to make the external device understand that the number of gaming values transmitted is small. Furthermore, by making the counting sound common, the number of types of counting sounds can be reduced.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the second case when the certain operation is the first operation, the sound output means is configured to output a sound when the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the first operation is 1. Means for outputting a fourth counting sound (for example, counting sound A) different from the first counting sound in a certain case,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above gaming machine, the difference in the counting sound makes it easier to understand the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means and the gaming value number transmitted to the external device.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Display window 130, 132 Bet button 134 Settlement button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Effect image display device 171 Count button 272, 277 Speaker 420 Various lamps 302 Game control section 350 Number of medals control section 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit 700 Rental machine 707 Rental button 800 Hall management terminal 810 Intermediate management terminal 820 Management server

Claims (1)

a first operating means;
a second operating means;
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A game value number control means capable of managing the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means having a gaming value number storage means capable of storing the number of gaming values,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of counting the number of gaming values in accordance with the operation of the first operating means,
The number of game values control means is a means that can set the number of game values to be counted by the counting process in accordance with the operation of the first operation means,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of inserting the number of gaming values in accordance with the operation of the second operating means,
When the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated, the second operation is performed before the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operating means is executed. When the input process is executed in accordance with the operation of the means, and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means becomes 0 after the execution of the input process (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). ),
In the first case, the number of gaming values scheduled to be counted is cleared without counting by the counting process;
A game machine characterized by:

Images